JP7266850B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) are displayed on a variable display device provided in the game area based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole provided in the game area (start winning). ) can be stored up to a predetermined number of starting memories that are rights to execute a variable display game. Then, a variable display game is executed based on the stored starting memory, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state is entered in which the special variable winning device is released. In addition, it is possible to change the probability of obtaining a special result with the derivation of a special result or the like as a trigger. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a pre-reading effect in which a preliminary determination is made regarding the starting memory before execution of the variable display game based on the starting memory, and the player is notified of the determination result (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-210310

The look-ahead effect in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 notifies by changing the display corresponding to the starting memory that when the starting memory occurs, the result of the variable display game based on the starting memory is highly likely to be a special result. However, such effects have already become commonplace and are insufficient to increase the interest in games. An object of the present invention is to improve the amusement of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
a starting memory means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories that are the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole;
advance determination means for determining the start memory before the game corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means is executed;
and an effect control means capable of executing an announcement effect, which is an effect suggesting the determination result by the prior determination means,
The production control means is
configured to select and execute a notice effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of notice effects,
The announcement performance is
a first group that can be continuously executed even during execution of the game to be notified;
belong to either the second group that ends before the start of the game to be notified, and
a third group that can be started from the game in which the starting memory to be notified is generated;
and a fourth group that can be started after the end of the game in which the starting memory to be notified is generated,
At a predetermined specific time in a game, it is determined which of the advance notice effects to execute or not is selected according to the group to which each notice effect belongs ,
The ratio of executing both the third group notice effect and the fourth group notice effect when the result of the game is a special result is the proportion of the third group when the game result is not a special result. making both the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect of the fourth group higher than the execution ratio,
The notice effect belonging to the third group is characterized in that the start timing can be changed according to the situation of the game in which the starting memory to be the notice target is generated.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining probability setting change/confirmation processing. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a flow chart for explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining winning number counter update processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead big hit determination process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining fall lottery processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 1 setting processing and big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fluctuation start information setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/in-interval processing transition setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit end setting process 1 and the big-hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during normal figure display. 10 is a flowchart for explaining 2-byte data acquisition processing; It is a flow chart explaining design variation control processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining 1-byte subtraction processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining 1-byte addition processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining effect command setting processing; It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a fanfare/interval process transition setting process; 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/during-interval processing; It is a figure explaining the area|region of ROM. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining areas of RAM; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between ROM programs and RAM areas; 9 is a flowchart for explaining performance display monitor control processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining initial display timer update processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining performance display editing processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining output processing; It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining variable command processing; FIG. It is a figure explaining prize ball number display. It is a figure explaining an example of the look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of a look-ahead effect.

<First embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is assembled to a support frame 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is the front frame 1
2 is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the housing. In addition, the front frame (body frame) 1
2, a glass frame 15 (
transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (
a storage tray), an upper tray ball outlet 22 through which game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full. A storage lower tray (receiving tray) 23, an operation section 24 of the ball shooting device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
At the upper edge of the is a production button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player.
A performance button 25 with built-in is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player.
Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button 27 operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 in front of the game board 30. do. Also, the player can press the production button 25 or the touch panel 2
By operating 9, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), it is possible to perform an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 8 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0 is provided. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting a game ball from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to approximately the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 for forming a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball passing through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 for effecting a game by operating it. This board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

One general winning opening 351 is arranged in the upper right game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 352 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . In addition, two general winning openings 353 and 354 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of a game ball to the general winning opening 351 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3), and winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 352 is detected by the winning opening switch 35b (see FIG. 3). Also, game balls that have entered the general winning holes 353 and 354 are detected by the winning hole switch 35c (see FIG. 3) after joining.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) that provides conditions for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 has a movable member (not shown), and this movable member normally maintains a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device is in an open state (game It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person).

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the normal solenoid 37
Although it is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by moving forward and backward (sliding) by c, the movable member of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary fluctuation winning device 3
The movable member 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by the general electric solenoid 37c, or may be reversed by the general electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of ".
Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there is a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper grand winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (not shown) that advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction.
By doing so, the upper big winning hole is converted into a state in which game balls can flow in. First special variable winning device 3
8, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the upper big prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, and by facilitating the inflow of game balls into the upper big prize opening, the player is given a predetermined A game value (prize ball) is provided. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area.
(See FIG. 3) is provided with a lever member actuated by. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. (In this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the special game state ends). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

In addition, inside the upper grand prize winning port, there is provided a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38
By matching the number of game balls detected in e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically this confirmation is performed. The opening of a new upper grand prize opening is not performed until is completed.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted between a state where the game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower grand prize opening) 39 is provided. Second special variable winning device 3
At 9, an opening/closing member (not shown) advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction, thereby converting the lower big winning hole into a state in which game balls can flow in. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a winning opening. In addition, the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32
In the lower right corner of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
And a collective display device 50 is provided for executing the normal pattern variation display game.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) etc.
Consists of a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) 51 for the variation display game and a special figure 2 indicator (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for the special figure 2 variation display game, and an LED lamp The first memory display unit 53 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second memory display unit 54 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 2 variation display game composed of LED lamps Prepare.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big win (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and the number of rounds that is advantageous to the player between left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for informing how to beat (a way to beat corresponding to the game state), and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. there is The collective display device 50 includes a probability state display unit for displaying that the probability state of the big win is high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when the big win occurs to notify the occurrence of the big win. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
In addition, a normal pattern display unit 58 for displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game, a normal pattern reservation display unit 59 for notifying the start memory number of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when the time saving state occurs, it lights up to notify the time saving state occurrence. A time saving state notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the display device 41 is performing the decoration special figure variation display game, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing cycle is set to 100 ms, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, in addition to the central segment, the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segments is also blinked. To display that it is fluctuating, special figure 1
and special figure 2 are configured to be distinguishable. Then, when the result of the game is "losing", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the 8th segment on the lower right side) is lit as a result of losing, and the result of the game is In the case of a "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the win (special result mode).

The first memory display unit 53 stores the number of undigested balls (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51. ,lighting blinking)
Display by
The second storage display unit 54 is the normal fluctuation winning device 37 that is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display device 52
The number of undigested balls out of the number of winning balls (number of starting memories = number of reservations) is turned off and lit (
flashing).
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when the special game state is not in progress, all the LEDs are turned off, and in the special game state, the LEDs are turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. turn it on. The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of LED lamps or the like. For example, when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting), all LEDs are turned off and left-handed When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (at the time of right-handed hitting), all the LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like.
In the case of the normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and in the case of the big win probability state being the high probability state (probability variable state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operation clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for the random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC power supply that generates a DC voltage of 32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and a game microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power failure;
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a win, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same A state that has become identification information,
However, excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random number generation for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure variation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A
constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, Winning mouth switches 35a, 35b in general winning mouths 351-354
, 35c, large winning opening switch 38a in first special variable winning device 38, large winning opening switch 39a in second special variable winning device 39, gate switch 34a in normal starting gate 34, first special variable winning device It is connected to a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e disposed in the 38, and an out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for inputting a negative logic signal such that the supplied high level is 11V and the low level is 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 3
4 a is input to the second input port 123 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signals of the specific area switch 38 d , the remaining ball outlet switch 38 e and the out ball detection switch 32 a are input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10,
A detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and a detection signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation section has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
It is configured such that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation units are operated. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value assigned a probability value that becomes a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. there is Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, press R while turning the setting key of the setting key operation section to the second position.
By turning on the power of the game machine while operating (depressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is entered, in which the probability setting value can be changed, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated ( ), the probability setting value can be changed. The selected probability set value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while an operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode). , the calculated base value and character ratio are displayed.

Also, the state where the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
2 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability set value confirmation mode in which the probability set value cannot be changed is entered. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may also be used.
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a)
, is also supplied to a test-firing test apparatus (not shown) through the relay board 70 . Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123 .

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is processed by the enable signal CE when the game microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . The reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of a certification organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, which cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as they are, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, in the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus as an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state in which the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the second large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39. Winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, first special variable winning device 38
While outputting the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the internal lever member and the general electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal variable winning device 37, the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value This is a port for output.
The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and outputs from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138c for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and the external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d for outputting, and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e has D as a power supply voltage so as to be able to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5V.
C5V is supplied from power supply 400 .
Also, the second driver 138b for driving the segment lines of the batch display device 50 has DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each game machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal fluctuation prize device 37 are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and when metal approaches the coils, the magnetic field changes. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can hold memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, and
It instructs the contents of the output video to the DP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, controls the driving of the motor and solenoid, manages the performance time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to inform the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait to inform that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44, etc. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311,
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311
3.3V DC based on 5V DC when using a low voltage LSI such as
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. Also, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

FIG. 5 shows the probability of a big win, the probability of a fall, the probability of a small win, and the distribution probability of the types of big wins when winning a big win. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories,
These terms are also used in this specification as terms having similar meanings.

The value of the jackpot probability (probability value), which is the probability of hitting the jackpot (first special result), is the special figure 1 and the special figure 2
, and the probability values in the low-probability state and the probability values in the high-probability state are respectively the probability values shown in FIG. 5(a).
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the same probability value is assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the high probability state. May be assigned a value. That is, the probability value in the high-probability state may be switchable in multiple steps.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. May be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of steps is not limited as long as the probability value in the low probability state can be switched in multiple steps. Also, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as probability values in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low-probability state may not be switchable in multiple steps.

In addition, the distribution of effects and the like may be made different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low-probability state. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, six probability setting values ("setting 1 ” to “Setting 6”) are assigned, but for example, three probability setting values (for example, “Setting 1”) are assigned to three types of probability values.
to "setting 3") and the remaining three probability setting values (eg, "setting 4" to "setting 6") may be unused.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d. By being (V passage), it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and becomes a low probability state when winning a drop lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG. 5(b).
In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

A small hit probability, which is a probability of a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 5(c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the game state or the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big win and the small win, the big win and the small win are not won in duplicate. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit is provided only in the special figure 2 and not in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but it is not limited to this. may be provided in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Also, if a small hit is provided for both special 1 and special 2, the small hit probability may be the same for special 1 and special 2, or special 2 is more likely than special 1. may be higher, and the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

In addition, FIG. 5(d) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in the special figures 1 and 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
The types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game include 10R probability variable jackpot and 4
There are three types of R probability variable jackpot and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and the probability variation indicates that there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area (variability operation area) and that it is likely to become a high probability state (variability state) after the special game state ends. , It indicates that the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area (probability variable operating area) is low and it is difficult to become a high probability state (probability variable state) after the special game state ends.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which opening control is performed such that winning balls are actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot (the actual number of rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). can be

Also, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is lower than that of the variable probability big win, but the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is higher than that of the normal big win.
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operating area). If game balls do not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, the high probability state occurs if the game balls flow into the specific area.

FIGS. 6(a) to 6(c) show opening modes in each round for each jackpot type. Details of the open mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the 10R variable probability big hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed to open a specific area (variable probability operation area).
Long opening with V is an opening mode with a high possibility that game balls flow into a specific area (probability variable operating area). After the second round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
As shown in FIG. 6(b), in the 4R probability variable jackpot, the first special variable winning device 3 in the first round
8 is opened and a specific area (probability variable operation area) is opened with V and long opening is performed. From the 2nd round to the 4th round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and the V-less long opening is performed, and from the 5th round onward, the first special variable winning device 3 is opened.
8 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. The non-V short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into the big winning opening is lower than the non-V long opening. That is, long opening without V is an opening mode in which winning balls are actually generated, and short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning balls are actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), in the 10R normal jackpot, in the first round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variable operation area) is opened. Short opening with V is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area) is lower than long opening with V. Then, from the second round onwards, a V-less long opening for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.
It is the V
Yes long open and V Yes short open only. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which game balls may flow into the specific area, is the first round. Note that the specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. again,
The specific round may be multiple times, such as the 1st round and the 5th round.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the opening possible time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (
For example, 9 game balls win a prize, the first special variable winning device 3
8 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening starts (t12), and when the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (
t13), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), in long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38
f is turned on, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area and game balls cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retreats from the specific area and game balls can flow in. becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off after 64 milliseconds from the start of the round (t32). After 100 milliseconds have elapsed since the lever solenoid 38f was turned off, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the winning game ball will flow into the specific area immediately after the first special variable winning device 38 is opened.

After 200 milliseconds from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t
34). After 2700 milliseconds have elapsed, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (
t35), when the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. (t39). After that, the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening is started (t39), and when the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t41), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t42). . In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Also, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned ON for a predetermined time (t36-t37, t38-t39). Also, the specific area switch 38d is enabled (t36). Since the second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, game balls almost certainly flow into the specific area. Become. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is variable, it will almost certainly be in a high-probability state.

In addition, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept ON for a predetermined period of time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43). It is also possible to flow into the specific area for the game ball that has been played. In addition, the first special variable prize winning device 38
is closed, and when all the game balls that have won the first special variable prize winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the upper grand prize winning opening, the lever solenoid 38f is activated at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41). is turned off to end the operation, and the specific area switch 38d is disabled.

In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed for the remaining ball processing time of the upper large winning opening. If the lever solenoid 38f is not completely discharged within the above period and the lever solenoid 38f is completely discharged by the end of the period (t43) in which the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF when the discharge is completed. is terminated, the specific area switch 38d is disabled.
In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed for the remaining ball processing time of the upper large winning opening. If not completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON (t43), the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON ends (t43). As a result, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation ends. In this case, after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43) and 100 milliseconds elapses, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t44).

As shown in FIG. 7(c), in the short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. (t54). Since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, it is rare to be in a high probability state.

It should be noted that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the specific area switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case of long open with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if game balls remain in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening has passed, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining balls is completed. , and the operation ends, and the specific area switch 38d is disabled. Also, if all the game balls are not ejected by the end of the period (t62) in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 3
At the end of the period in which 8f is ON (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF and the operation ends, and after the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF (t62).
, 100 milliseconds later, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t63).

Also, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in long opening with V shown in FIG. 7(b), and the first special variation in short opening with V shown in FIG. 7(c) The opening of the winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an opening time that allows the first special variable winning device 38 to win at least one game ball.

As shown in FIG. 7(d), in short opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t71), and a predetermined number (for example, 9 ) is established, the first special variable winning device 38
is closed to end the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that the predetermined number of wins, which is the closing condition, occurs, and in most cases the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening is started (t72), and when the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t73), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

In addition, FIG. 6(d) shows an opening mode in the second special game state (special game state based on a small hit). In the second special game state, first, a small winning fanfare time is started,
When the small winning fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and 160
The second special variable prize winning device 39 is closed when either condition of 0 milliseconds of openable time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is met. After that, the small winning remaining ball processing time is started, and when the small winning remaining ball processing time ends, the small winning ending time starts, and when the small winning ending time ends, the second special game state ends. In addition, the second
There may be a plurality of types of opening/closing modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the special game state, and in that case, for example, which opening/closing mode is set (adopted) is determined based on the small winning pattern.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
In the game state, normal game state ST1, first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST
There are 3. In addition, as the special game state, there is a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game controlled by the production control device 300, the main in the game state A main starting area which is a starting area to be aimed at, a main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and a shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the start winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim for winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. In addition, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST1. .

In the second specific game state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (when there is V passage), it becomes a high probability state. In addition, there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electricity support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37.
That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no general electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game. It is a state that there is a reduction in time to shorten the fluctuation time of. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a small hit RUSH. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game in the state with the general electric support (normal pattern probability) is the same probability as the state without the general electric support (normal probability). Not limited to, in a state where there is a general electric support, the general pattern probability can be set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without general electric support means that the normal variable prize winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is shorter than the state with general electric support. be.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a shorter time state than in the case of the normal game state ST1, and the normal variable winning device 37 is hit to the right. It is advantageous for the player to aim at and play the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (in the case of this embodiment, the special figure 1 small hit probability is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since the probability of doing so is high, small hits occur with high frequency in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win in the second specific game state ST3, the state with the general electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small win, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win, the state without general electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small win. Also, in a special game state based on a small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 6(d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win in the second specific game state ST3, most of the game balls hit to the right are normal fluctuation winning in the special game state based on the small win. The second prize winning device 37 and arranged below the normal variable winning device 37
It does not flow down to the special variable winning device 39. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur with high frequency, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win in the first specific game state ST2, most of the game balls hit to the right are normal fluctuation winning in the special game state based on the small win. Without winning the device 37, it flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. - 特許庁Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the number of game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur with high frequency and the player's possession of balls increases, so the effect mode is the small hit RUSH.
This mode is called

Among these three game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1 because of the general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state, and further,
Since this is a state in which the number of balls possessed by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, this state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3.

The transition of the game state is carried out by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, completing the specified number of games, and winning the falling lottery, which is the lottery for transition to the low probability state. . Basically, the probability variable jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and in the first special game state, the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and the specific area switch When detected at 38d (when there is V passage), the transition to the first specific game state ST2 occurs after the end of the first special game state. On the other hand, when the variable probability big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific area (variable probability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage case), after the end of the first special game state, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is no V passage in the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special game state Second specific game state ST
3). On the other hand, the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is V passage in the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special game state It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, the first
When the drop lottery is won in the specific game state ST2, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. again,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply called hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The game ball that is launched is
It flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34, general winning openings 351 to 354, and starting winning opening 36 , the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32 . Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning ports 351 to 354, the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, it depends on the type of the winning winning port. A number of prize balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from a payout unit controlled by a payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the disposed general winning ports 353 and 354, and by shooting a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special The variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning openings 351 and 352 can be aimed at.

In the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a composed of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), add the normal figure start memory number (+1
) to store one normal drawing start memory in the ROM 111B. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern variation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern variation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern variation display game wins and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If there is no winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal pattern display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.
In addition, the normal figure display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and the normal identification information includes numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, variably display this for a predetermined period of time, and then stop display to display the result.

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display unit 58 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electrical solenoid 37c is operated to activate the movable member of the normal variation winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern as a result of the loss.

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 is set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
), and stores a second start memory forming a start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on winnings to the starting prize winning port 36 and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. Numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as first start memory and second start memory. And the number of memories of this starting memory is the first memory display unit 53 (special figure 1 reservation display) and the second memory display unit 54 (special figure 2 reservation display) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50 , and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, but during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (jackpot). If it is, the one special figure variation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (loss result). Also, during execution of one of the special figure fluctuation display games, if the other special figure fluctuation display game results in a second special result (small hit), the one of the special game states until the end of the special game state based on the small hit The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It constitutes a first execution control means for controlling. In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100,
It constitutes a second execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning area).

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and it becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display device 51 constitutes first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning hole 36 . Also, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a jackpot game state (first special game state)
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (high probability of winning or having general electric support) It is possible to do That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display device 41
A decoration special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variable display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without having the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 in 0.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is 0), but when it is in the normal game state A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game in FIG. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting the left hand and aiming at the start winning opening 36. - 特許庁
In addition, the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Also, the time of long fluctuation may be changed according to the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss or a small hit, a long variation of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the special figure 2
A long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the game control device 10
0 game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 9, first, processing for inhibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs, is processed. Stack pointer setting process (step X2) to set
I do. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and a predetermined register (for example, D
(step X4). In this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h
or 01h is taken, and the leading 00h is set at step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device 1 acting as main control means
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to start normally according to instructions from 00
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the game machine power wait for it to shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. determine whether there is Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X57, which will be described later. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Also, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired,
Access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) to start a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (step X14). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the frequency-divided signal.
11A has a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a signal CTC that triggers random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg, 5Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal (for example, A5h)
(step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM. match the checksum (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step X19; N), step Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. In other words, if the gaming machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, in the performance display device 153,
A display as shown in FIG. 13(h) is performed. After that, the on data of the security signal is output and the off data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26).
, return to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speaker 1
The fact that the probability set value is being changed is notified by means of voice output from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, step X29,
The process of X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the OFF state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23 ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X44).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step X44; N)
In other words, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process moves to step X41 to perform the processing for the normal recovery from the power failure.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X44
In ;Y), the process proceeds to step X45 to perform the initialization process. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

If the setting key switch 152 is on (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, the production control board (production control device 300) for the command during probability setting confirmation
(step X37). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting confirmation command, the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
By the light emission of, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
It notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X126) of the timer interrupt processing when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode is selected. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
If the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is not output for 128 milliseconds after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. be. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, at least 5
Since it is necessary to output the security signal during 0 ms, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). At step X33, determination is not made based on the state read at step X6 (state at power-on), but the state (current state) read in the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). decision based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and if no power failure has occurred (step X34;
N), the process returns to step X33, and when a power failure occurs (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X58. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 9 and 10) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. Processing for enabling interrupts (step X32
) and before the interrupt prohibiting process (steps X38, X58), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X126
) is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command,
The notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set is the area to be initialized (for example, the blackout inspection area,
A power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in a checksum area and an area related to error monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared at this step X41.

After that, the contents of the initial display setting flag area for storing the initial display setting flag for causing the performance display device 153 to perform an initial display when the power is turned on are referred to (read out). is set (written) (step X42). This will
The initial display setting flag is turned on. Then, the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X43), and the process proceeds to step X50. In the case of this embodiment, in step X43, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command Send command. As a command for specifying the screen, if both special figures 1 and 2 are in normal processing, which will be described later,
That is, if the player is waiting for a customer, i.e., neither the special figure variation display game is being executed nor the special game state, the command for the customer waiting demonstration screen is transmitted, otherwise the command for the recovery screen is transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X45). At step X45, the RAM area for probability setting values (work area (1-byte area for probability setting values)) and the RAM area for performance display (base value and character ratio display) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, 0 clear the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area). Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared at this step X45. Note that at step X45,
The stack area and unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X46).
. The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Next, the normal base state information is saved (written) in the normal base state determination flag area for storing the normal base state information indicating that the normal game state is neither the special game state nor the specific game state (step X47), Refers to the contents of the initial display setting flag area (read)
Then, if it is unset, the initial display setting flag is set (written) (step X
48). As a result, the initial display setting flag is turned on. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X49). In the case of this embodiment, in step X49, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, RA
A plurality of commands such as an M initialization command (a command to display a customer waiting demonstration screen and notify RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game with the effect number information command and general electric support, etc. is also transmitted.

Next, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X50). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to arbitrarily set it.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers to determine the winning pattern of the special pattern (big hit pattern random number, small winning pattern random number), random numbers to determine the hit of the general pattern (hit random number ), R
After saving in a predetermined area of WM (step X51), interrupts are permitted (step X5
2). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X53) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to destroy the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in a random number generating circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and falling lottery random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each random number is +1 or -1
A counter-type update may be used, or a random-type update may be used in which all values within a range appear randomly without duplication until a cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, there is no random number (hitting pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, so there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern. may be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process of step X53, the process of prohibiting interrupts (step X54)
to perform performance display editing processing (step X55). Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X56), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X57). If the power failure has not occurred (step X57; N), the initial value random number update process (Step X5
Return to 3). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, a loop process is performed in which the initial value random number updating process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. Initial value random number update process (step X
53), by enabling the interrupt (step X52), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed by the initial value random number update process. It is possible to avoid pressure on interrupt processing due to being kept waiting.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step X53 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X57; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step X58) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X59) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X60
), save the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X61).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step X62) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum (step X63), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X64), it waits until the gaming machine is powered off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.
Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (
A game control device 100) is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG.
timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1
01). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y) , probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X126)
to terminate the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are controlled based on the output data set in various processes. , lever solenoid 38f, general electric solenoid 37
Output processing (step X105) for performing drive control of actuators such as c) is performed. When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, random number update processing 1 (step X107),
Random number update processing 2 (step X108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switches 35a to 35c, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the setting of the prize ball, the front frame Winning opening switch/state monitoring processing (step X109) for monitoring errors such as opening of the glass frame and illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 38a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port 1 switch 3
6a and starting port switch monitoring processing (step X
111). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37
Various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted based on the winning of game balls. And special figure 1
Special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing processing related to the variation display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing processing regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, normal figure game processing for performing processing regarding the normal figure variation display game (Step X114) is performed, and the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display various information related to the display of the special figure fluctuation display game and the game
to display the desired content segment LED editing process (step X115)
I do.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality. board radio fraud monitoring processing (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring processing (step X118) for checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and determining whether abnormal discharge has occurred Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, the flag register is saved (step X121), and performance display monitor control processing related to control of the performance display device 153 is performed. (
Step X122) is performed.

Thereafter, the flag register is restored (step X123), and it is determined whether the initial display setting flag is on (step X124). If the initial display setting flag is not ON (step X124; N), the timer interrupt processing is terminated. If the initial display setting flag is ON (step X124; Y), the initial display setting flag is cleared (set to OFF state) (
Step X125), the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X1
26) was shown. In this probability setting change/confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X13).
1).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y)
is set the probability setting value display data corresponding to the value of the probability setting value area (current probability setting value) in the RWM (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is sent to the second output port. 134 to the fifth driver 138e (step X134). This will
In the performance display device 153, displays as shown in FIGS. 13(a) to 13(f) are performed.
On the other hand, if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131
;N), set the light-off data as probability set value display data (step X133),
The probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X134). 13(g) in the performance display device 153.
is displayed as shown in .

As shown in FIG. 13, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type displays) arranged side by side. During the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays indicates the current probability setting value, and the remaining 7-segment displays indicate "SET " is shown.
Specifically, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1". If the segment indicator displays "1" and the value in the area for probability settings in the RWM is "1", the current probability settings are "1".
Since the setting is 2", "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13(b). probability setting value is "Setting 3
”, “3” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13(c), and RW
If the value of the probability setting value area in M is "3", the current probability setting value is "setting 4", so as shown in FIG. 4" is displayed, and if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "4", the current probability setting value is "setting 5". When "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so FIG.
As shown in 3(f), "6" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display. Further, when the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 13(g).
For example, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and "T" in the third digit. Probability setting value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step X1
35). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on data of the security signal is output and the off data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). At step X136, security signal ON data is output regardless of whether the security signal control timer has timed out. Therefore, during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are set), the security signal continues to be output.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set ends the probability setting change/confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process being executed is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on of the gaming machine 10. It is determined whether it is confirmation processing (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on (step X138; N)
determines whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139).
At step X139, the RAM initialization switch 1 is set in the previous input process (step X103).
When an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of 12 is detected, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 . If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y),
That is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change/confirmation process is executed. finish. The value updated in step X140 (updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change/confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5(a), "setting 1" to "setting 6" are applied to three types of probability values (probability values in a low-probability state and probability values in a high-probability state). However, for example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the RWM probability setting value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0-2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the game machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability set value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with .
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only be pressed, it is impossible to distinguish between a shift operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, if the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability set value change mode) continues even during the probability set value change mode, that is, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch If the button 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input processing of the timer interrupt processing (step X103), the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input processing is OFF, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input processing is OFF. When the state is the ON state, an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input processing (step X103) in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, the input processing immediately before power-off is the previous input processing, and the input processing immediately after power-on is the current input processing. The state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the process is highly likely to be the OFF state. That is, if the shift operation continues even during the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge ) is likely to be detected.
Therefore, in this case, when the processing of steps X139 and X140 is performed in the probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation, Inconvenience may arise that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the processes of steps X139 and X140 are not performed in the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. It is assumed that As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability set value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has continued since the power was turned on (
That is, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability set value change mode is ignored, so unintended updating can be prevented.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result.
An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and storage means for storing one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for game lottery are assigned. (game control device 100 (RAM 111C)), and a mode for shifting to a probability set value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the transition means (game control device 100) and the operation of the second operation unit in the probability set value change mode, the probability set value stored in the storage means (the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM ) for changing the setting change means (game control device 100), and the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability setting value change mode, and the second for changing the probability setting value The operation of the operation unit (change operation) is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting change means continues from the time the game machine is powered on even during the probability set value change mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit that is being performed.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the gaming machine is powered on continues even after the mode is shifted to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed.

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
FIG. 14 shows the winning opening switch/status monitoring process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process.
09) was shown. In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first, a winning hole monitoring table 1 corresponding to the big winning hole switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38 is prepared (step X3
01), Fraud & Winning Monitoring Processing (step X302), which monitors whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the first special variable winning device 38 is not open, and detects normal winning.
). After that, prepare a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the big winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39 (step X303), monitor whether there is an illegal winning and detect a normal winning. A monitoring process (step X304) is executed.

The winning opening monitoring table contains a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraud winning number area,
A fraudulent prize winning error notification command, a fraudulent winning number upper limit value (fraudulent occurrence determination number), a prize winning port switch table address, and notification timer update information (permission/update) information are defined. In addition, the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) is stored in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table
In addition, for each switch, the information of the monitor switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 are defined. The winning hole monitor table is prepared for each switch to be monitored.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general electrical system is prepared (step X305), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning or not and to detect normal winning. (Step X306) is executed. Then, a winning opening switch (for example, start opening 1 switch 36a, general winning opening 351 ~
A winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switches 35a to 35c of 354 is prepared (step X3
07), a winning number counter update process (step X308) for updating the winning number is performed, and a start opening error monitoring process (step X309) is performed.

Next, update a state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose states are to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time (step X310). In the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated from 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. State monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", state monitoring based on the shot ball cut switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", the state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", the state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. be.

Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X313). Then, a game machine state check process (step X314) for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is performed. In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. When the state monitoring is set and the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring based on the signal output from the body frame open detection switch 64 is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", state monitoring based on the frame radio wave fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step X315), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step X315; N), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step X315; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X316).
), gaming machine state check processing (step X
317).

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. Two-signal based condition monitoring is set up. It should be noted that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 does not define a case where the state scan counter is from "1" to "3".

After that, a payout busy signal check process (step X318) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is completed. Note that the processing from steps X316 to X318 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is "0", so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing from steps X316 to X318 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
FIG. 15 shows fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps X302, X304, X306) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is applied to the large winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. It is the process that takes place. For the big winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39) and the general electric power (ordinary variable winning device 37), the opening/closing member is forcibly opened, the game balls are put in, and the prize balls are paid out. Since fraud is likely to occur, fraud is monitored in addition to detection of prize winning.

In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X321).
step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors is the big winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors. is the big winning opening switch 39a, the second
It is a period other than during the special game state in which the special variable winning device 39 is opened, and when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the start port 2 switch 37a, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is performed based on the hit of the normal figure. It is a period other than the running state.

Then, if it is the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X3
32). In addition, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings of interest is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of fraudulent winnings after updating is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether there is (step X325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch to be monitored for errors, the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations is set to 5, but the number of fraudulent occurrences is defined differently for each type of winning opening switch. can also The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is caught in the valid period of the big winning opening switch. This is to avoid judging it as fraud when a prize is won past the time limit or when noise is superimposed on the signal, and to avoid simply judging an error even though it is not fraudulent.

Then, if the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the monitoring target fraud occurrence judgment number (step X325
;N) prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (step X330)
. In the winning gate monitoring table (fraud monitoring table) prepared in the winning gate switch/state monitoring process, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of the data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, and the lower address of the fraud monitoring information , lower address of fraudulent prize winning area, fraudulent prize winning error notification command, fraudulent prize winning upper limit value (fraudulent occurrence determination number), address of prize winning port switch table, notification timer update information (permit/update) information is defined. .

In addition, when the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored (step X325;
Y) keeps the number of fraudulent prize winnings as the fraudulent occurrence judgment number (step X326), and saves the initial value (for example, 60000 msec) in the target fraudulent prize winning notification timer area (step X327).
Next, a target fraudulent occurrence command is prepared (step X328), a fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step X329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (step X330), and perform the winning number counter update process (step X331) for setting the prize balls. conduct. Then, load the target notification timer update information (
Step X332), if the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X334
). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335), and if the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step X336), and the illegal winning cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. prepare (step X337
). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).
.

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of fraudulent winnings is cleared ( Step X339), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (
step X340). Moreover, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X3
38; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer has become 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340).

Then, when the prepared fraudulent flag matches the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step X
340; Y) terminates the illegality & winning monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and effect command setting processing is performed. (
Step X342), the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of the error, and an illegal winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
FIG. 16 shows winning number counter update processing (steps X308, X331) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step X351), and it is checked whether there is an input (exactly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. Determine (step X352). The winning table of the winning opening monitoring table (fraud monitoring table) prepared in the winning opening switch/status monitoring process contains, in addition to the number of times of monitoring repetition (the number of switches), a monitor switch bit, Information on the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address information of the winning number counter area 2 is defined.

If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X363), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X364). Also, if there is an input to the target winning entrance switch (
Step X352; Y) loads the value of target win number counter area 1 (step X3
53), update the loaded value by +1 (step X354), and determine whether it overflows (step X355). And if no overflow has occurred (step X
355; N) saves the updated value in winning number counter area 1 (step X356),
The value of target win number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). Also, if an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target win number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). In the case of this embodiment, at step X354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (0 to 65
535 range).

After loading the target winning number counter area 2 value (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step X35).
9). In this embodiment, step X358 updates the counter for the main prize signal. The counter size is 1 byte (ranging from 0 to 255). If overflow occurs (step X359; Y), the process proceeds to step X361. If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the process proceeds to step X361.

Next, a target winning notification command is prepared (step X361), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X362). The target winning notification command is a command for notifying the effect control device 300 that each winning opening has won. This command will
It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 that there has been a prize to the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39 and the general winning ports 351 to 354. The effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the winning based on this command.

After that, update the table address to the address of the next record (step X363),
It is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X363). If monitoring of all switches has not been completed (step X364; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X352). Also, when the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step X364; Y), the win number counter update process is finished. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning to the winning area, and the winning information is stored. In addition, the information on the winning according to the winning opening is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

In addition, for the general winning openings 351 to 354, the winning opening switches 35a to 35c to be detected
A different winning notification command is sent for each. As a result, in the effect control device 300, the winning to the general winning opening 351 detected by the winning opening switch 35a, the winning to the general winning opening 352 detected by the winning opening switch 35b, and the winning opening detected by the winning opening switch 35c. Winning to the general prize winning openings 353 and 354 can be distinguished from each other, and an effect corresponding to each can be executed. Also, as will be described later, in this embodiment, since effects based on winning to the general winning ports 353 and 354 are not performed, the winning notification command based on detection by the winning port switch 35c may not be transmitted.

That is, the winning openings with the same function (general winning openings 351 to 354 that generate only prize balls)
), for a plurality of winning openings in one of the two game areas 32 (the right game area, the second area), information is transmitted that can distinguish the respective winning openings,
It can be said that for the plurality of winning holes in the other game area 32 (the left game area, the first area), the information that makes it impossible to distinguish between the winning openings is transmitted or the information is not transmitted. In addition, regarding the winning openings having the same function, the information based on the winning to the winning opening in one of the two game areas 32 (the game area on the right side) It can be said that the information based on the winning to the winning opening in the area) is made different information or the information is transmitted only from one of the game areas 32 . At least one in each of the two play areas 32
It suffices if the winning openings having the same function are arranged.

In addition, for the winning ports with the same function, the information based on the winning to the winning port on one of the multiple branched flow paths (right flow path) and the other flow path (left flow path) ) is made different from the information based on the prize-winning to the prize-winning opening, or the information is transmitted only from one of the flow-down routes. In addition, although it is assumed that there are two game areas 32 or two flow-down routes, there may be three or more game areas 32 or flow-down routes. For the winning openings with the same function, the game area 3
2 or different information may be transmitted according to the flow route. In addition, each game area 32
Alternatively, the information may be transmitted only for a specific game area 32 or a winning opening provided in each flow path.

In addition, although it was assumed that different prize notification commands were sent for prize gates with the same function,
It can also be said that different winning notification commands are transmitted for winning openings with the same game value (number of winning balls, etc.) to be provided. Also, it can be said that different winning notification commands are transmitted for winning openings that can win at the same time. In addition, as a winning entrance with the same function and game value to be given,
In addition to the general winning ports 351 to 354, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 3
9 can be mentioned. However, since the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are not opened at the same time, they cannot win at the same time.

In addition, the winning notification command may not be transmitted for the winning opening that can always transmit the winning notification to the effect control device 300 by a command different from the winning notification command. However, if the command is not always sent when there is a prize, the prize notifying command is sent. For example, for the normal variable winning device 37, the decorative special figure pending number command is transmitted with the generation of the second start memory based on the winning, but when the second starting memory reaches the upper limit and there is a prize Since the second start memory does not occur in , the decoration special figure pending number command is not transmitted. In the case of such a winning opening, when there is a winning, the winning notification command may be transmitted at all times, and when the decorative special figure pending number command is transmitted, the winning notification command is not transmitted, You may make it transmit a prize-winning notification command only when a decoration special figure reservation number command is not transmitted.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 17 shows the starting port switch monitoring process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process described above.
11) was shown. In this starting opening switch monitoring process, first, starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36)
A winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and hardware random number acquisition processing (step X49
2). Then, in the hardware random number acquisition process, it is determined whether or not there is starting opening winning information set when a jackpot random number is obtained based on winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X49).
3).

Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36, when the starting opening winning information is not set (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting entrance winning prize is set based on the winning to the starting winning mouth 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether it is in the special low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (Step X494). And, if there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X49
4;Y), the process proceeds to step X497. In addition, if it is not during special figure low probability & time saving (step X494; N), prepare a right hitting instruction notification command (step X495)
, effect command setting processing (step X496) is performed.

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification is performed by display, sound, or the like to instruct the player to hit right. During a specific game state or a special game state, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player, and a start prize-winning port 36 that is designed not to win unless left-handed hits during a specific game state or special game state. When a prize is detected in the inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, prepare a table for setting hold information by start port 1 (step X497).
, Performs special figure start opening switch common processing (step X498). Next, a winning monitoring table for starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step X499), hardware random number acquisition processing (step X500) is performed, and a jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is starting entrance winning information set in the case (step X501).

If the information with starting entrance winning is not set based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (
At step X501; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set.
On the other hand, when the starter winning information is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), the normal electric power (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which game balls can be won (step X502), and when the general electric power is in operation (step X502; Y),
Move to step X504. On the other hand, if the general electricity is not in operation (step X502; N)
In step X503, it is determined whether or not an electricity fraud is occurring (step X503).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred.
If there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If the utility power fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more. In addition, if it is not during the general electric fraud occurrence (step X503; N), prepare a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 (step X504), special figure start port switch common processing (step X50
5) is performed to end the starting port switch monitoring process.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
FIG. 18 shows the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps X498, X505) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

In this special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, out of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the game machine 1
Load the start signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of 0 (step X521), update the loaded value by +1 (step X522), and determine whether the output count overflows (step X523).
If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is set to R
Save in the starting port signal output count area of WM (step X524), and the special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the starting door switch to be monitored, that is, the special figure holding (starting memory) number to be updated is the upper limit value ( Here, it is determined whether it is less than 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but when the upper limit is stored, the value after updating is not saved because it loops and becomes 0 due to the +1 update.

And when the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 (Step X526), save the target starting gate winning flag (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process is saved in the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (Step X529).

After that, extract and prepare the jackpot pattern random number of the starting port switch to be monitored (step X5
30), save in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and the RWM
(step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning to the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step X53
4) If there is no winning to the starting port 2 (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), a small winning design random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step X536). .

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X53
8). Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step X539), production command setting process (step X540)
To end the special figure start opening switch common processing.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number is used as a first start memory to store up to a predetermined upper limit number. Forms a starting memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and converts the predetermined random number to the second
It constitutes a second start memory means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as a start memory.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 show the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538) in the special figure starting opening switch common process described above. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether it is during the big hit (during the first special game state) (step X541), and when it is during the big hit (step X541; Y), special figure reservation information determination End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not in progress (step X541; N), the starting opening prize flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the winning to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) is performed. (step X542).

In the case of winning the starting slot 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform prefetching. On the other hand, if it is not a prize to the starting port 1 (step X542; N),
It is determined whether it is during special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (step X543). And, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal game state, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, no prefetching is performed. On the other hand, if there is no special figure low probability & short time (step X543; N
), it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (step X544).

When it is not in special figure high probability (step X544; N), it transfers to step X548. On the other hand, if it is in the special figure high probability (step X544; Y), is the fall lottery random number value prepared in step X532 of the special figure start opening switch common processing within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determine (step X545). Next, a look-ahead falling lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), effect command setting processing (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a pre-reading big-hit determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit depending on whether or not the big-hit random value matches the big-hit determination value (low-probability-of-hit-hit determination value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step X551), and prepared in step X530 of the special figure starter switch common processing. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number (
Step X552) and move to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special starting opening switch common processing is checked, and starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X553).

In the case of not winning a prize to the starting port 2 (step X553; N), set stop symbol information of a loss (step X558), and shift to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), small hit determination processing (step X554) for determining whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value or not. I do. and,
When the judgment result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (step X556), and step X535 of the special figure start opening switch common processing
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X557),
Go to step X559. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step X555;
In N), set stop symbol information of lost (step X558), and save the stop symbol information acquired at step X552 or X557 or the stop symbol information set at step X558 in the symbol information area (step X558). X559).

After that, a look-ahead stop symbol command (
low probability) is prepared (step X560), effect command setting processing (step X561)
I do.
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and the prediction big hit determination processing (step X563) determines whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (big hit high probability determination value). I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step X565), and the special figure starter switch common processing is performed in step X530. stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is obtained (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a big hit (step X564; N)
In, the start opening winning flag saved at step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and it is determined whether it is a winning to the starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X567).

In the case of not winning a prize to the starting port 2 (step X567; N), set stop symbol information of a loss (step X572), and shift to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), small hit determination processing (step X568) for determining whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the judgment result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (step X570), and step X535 of the special figure start opening switch common processing
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X571),
Move to step X573. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step X569;
In N), set stop pattern information of the missing (step X572), and determine whether it is in the special figure high probability (step X573).

And when it is not in special figure high probability (step X573; N), it transfers to step X575. On the other hand, if it is in the special figure high probability (step X573; Y), step X55
Overwrite and save the stop symbol information acquired at step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information set at step X572 in the symbol information area where the stop symbol information was saved at step X574 (step X574). In addition, the stop pattern information saved in the pattern information area is
It is used for the look-ahead of fluctuation patterns.

Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (
high probability) is prepared (step X575), effect command setting processing (step X576)
I do. Thus, in this embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result determined by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result determined by the jackpot high probability determination value are the production control device 3
00.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. I do.
Then, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step X579), perform the production command setting process (step X580), and determine the special figure reservation information. End the process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the prefetch fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the lookahead target, and the lookahead stop including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the lookahead target A pattern command and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300.例文帳に追加As a result, the result-related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether or not it will fall (whether the probability state of the big hit shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state)), whether it is a big hit or a small hit, etc. , type of variation pattern) determination result (look-ahead result) before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory production control device 30
0, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, and notifying the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It becomes possible to

That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means capable of determining the result of the variable display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). form a pre-judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine in advance the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated,
Any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed.

[Look-ahead big hit determination processing]
FIG. 21 shows the look-ahead big hit determination process (step X
549, X563). In this look-ahead big-hit determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big-hit judgment value is set (step X581), and it is judged whether the value of the target big-hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the look-ahead big-hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (step X583). If the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step X584), the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit It is determined whether it is greater than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, if the judgment flag is not the high probability judgment flag (step X583; N), that is, if it is the low probability judgment flag, the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step X587), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the look-ahead big-hit judgment processing ends.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
In FIG. 22, special figure 1 game processing (step X112) in the timer interrupt processing described above
showed that. In the special figure 1 game process, the control of the whole process relating to the special figure 1 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In this special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 interruption flag which is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y99). The special figure 1 variation display game is performed when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is the second special result (minor win) during execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the second special game state is executed. , is interrupted during execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 suspension flag is not set (step Y99; N), that is, special figure 1
If the variation display game has not been interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y100, and the subsequent processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y99; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the processing relating to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of steps Y100 to Y115 is performed. Without performing, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variation display game does not progress (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game, first, whether the special figure 2 is in the middle of a big hit/minor hit,
That is, it is determined whether the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variation display game being a big hit or a small hit (step Y100). And when it is during the big hit/minor hit of special figure 2 (step Y100; Y), it transfers to step Y103. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 big hit/small hit is not in progress (step Y100; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y101) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set a large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when a prescribed number of winnings have been made to the large winning opening. process. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being a big win is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game result is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the big hit or the small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process which will be described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). Perform processing to set the region passing flag. A special game state is generated based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

Then, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y103), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). And special figure 1
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y116. Also, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is branched. For this purpose, first, prepare a special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to in a register (step Y10
5), the special figure 1 game processing number is loaded and prepared (step Y106), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y107). Thereby, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired from the special figure 1 game sequence branch table, and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y108).

At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special Figure 1
Special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation
I do.
At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. 1 During fluctuation processing (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Special figure 1 display process (
Step Y111) is performed.

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game process number is "5", a process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round,
Large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 big hit end processing etc. is performed.
At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y115) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) I do.

After that, prepare a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (
Step Y116), symbol variation control processing (step Y117) pertaining to the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed, and lever solenoid control processing (step Y
118) to end the special figure 1 game process. This special figure 1 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control relating to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game).

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 show the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) in the timer interrupt processing described above. In the special figure 2 game processing, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 2 display are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether a special game state is being executed based on the fact that the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (step Y130). And, if it is during the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y130; Y)
to step Y133. Also, if it is not during the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1
At 30; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y131) and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y132) are performed.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set a large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when a prescribed number of winnings have been made to the large winning opening. process. In the special figure 2 game processing, a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a big winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). Perform processing to set the region passing flag. Based on the fact that the specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special game state is performed.

Then, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y133), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). And special figure 2
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y153. Also, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. (step Y135).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y136), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The variable timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved (step Y137), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game with a high probability of occurrence of small hits in the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state is very long. (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times of timing using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of timing for a specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number, first, refer to the special figure 2 game sequence branch table is prepared in the register (step Y138), the special figure 2 game processing number is loaded and prepared (step Y139), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y140). Thereby, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is obtained using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table, and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y141).

At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special Figure 2
Special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation
I do.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2 A process during fluctuation (step Y143) is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Special figure 2 display processing (
Step Y144) is performed.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", a process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round,
A large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit end processing is performed.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. Small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y1
49).
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y150) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc. conduct.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle processing, or ending the small winning A small hit remaining ball process (step Y151) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (
Step Y153), the symbol variation control process (step Y154) pertaining to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid control process (step Y
155) is performed to end the special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 25 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 1 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y201; N), set "0" as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), end the special figure 1 normal processing. Also, when the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the instruction to hit left has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. Also, if the left-handed instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing (step Y20
4) is performed to set a left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is designed to be cleared when the specific game state ends, and thereby the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206), and when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y206; N), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y207), effect command setting process (step Y2
08). After that, a special figure 1 variation start process (step Y209) for setting information about the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is prepared (step Y210 ), effect command setting processing (step Y211) is performed.
In addition, at the time of performing the processing (step Y210) for preparing the decorative special figure pending number command, the subtraction of the special figure 1 pending number based on the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 pending We are preparing a pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number minus 1 from the number. Thereafter, a command for the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y212), and effect command setting processing (step Y213) is performed.

Next, set the special figure 1 changing in the special figure status area (addition of information) (step Y21
4). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure fluctuation display game, 0 to 5
is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variation display game is being performed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 indicates a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. It indicates that there is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuating process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 usual process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 26 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit and the end of the special game state. In addition, it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but in that case the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 2 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y221; N), set "0" as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (Step Y239), end the special figure 2 normal processing. Also, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (step Y222).

And, if the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (step Y222; N), prepare the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y223), and perform the production command setting process (step Y224). . After that, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y225) for setting information related to special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command corresponding to special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step Y226 ), effect command setting processing (step Y227) is performed. In addition, processing to prepare the decoration special figure pending number command (step Y226)
At the time of performing, the special figure 2 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number minus 1 from the current special figure 2 reservation number are preparing. Thereafter, a command for the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y228), and effect command setting processing (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y23
0). Since the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started here, 2 or 3 as a special figure status
is set. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuating process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number is 0
(step Y232). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not in fluctuation (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234), and when it has not started (step Y234; N),
Perform processing related to customer waiting state setting. Also, if the number of special figures 1 pending is not 0 (step Y
232; N), when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233; Y) or when the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step Y234; Y), the process proceeds to step Y238.

In the processing for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y235), a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and a presentation is performed. Command setting processing (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without a backup function loses information on the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the probability information command based on the change in the game state. It is possible to return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207, Y223). Thereby, the production control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production corresponding to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. can return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. In addition, the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for returning to the effect corresponding to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
In FIG. 27 (a), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step Y2
09) was shown. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination process is set (step Y241). Then R
Load random numbers from WM's special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) and prepare (step Y242), and clear the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) to 0 (step Y.
243), fall lottery processing for lottery for transition from high probability state to low probability state (step Y24).
4). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 1).

Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the losing information or the big hit information as the result information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop pattern (symbol information) is performed. Design setting processing (step Y246) is performed. Then, special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24
7) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (step Y248).

After that, special figure 1 to set the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game
Variation pattern setting processing (step Y249) is performed, variation start information setting processing (step Y250) for setting variation start information for the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and time reduction variation number update processing (step Y251) is performed. . Next, set "1" for special figure 1 fluctuation processing as the processing number (step Y252), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal relating to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 variation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (special figure 1 indicator 51
flashing cycle timer) save the initial value (here 100 ms) (step Y257
), the initial value ("0" indicating a blank design here) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y258), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
In FIG. 27(b), special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y2
25) was shown. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination process is set (step Y261). Then R
Load random numbers from WM's special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) and prepare (step Y262), and clear the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) to 0 (step Y.
263), fall lottery processing for lottery for transition from high probability state to low probability state (step Y26).
4). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2).

Next, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the loss information, the big hit information or the small hit information as the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the special figure 2 stop pattern (symbol information) is set. Special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y266) it does. Then, to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern, and to refer to various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of is set (step Y268).

After that, special figure 2 to set the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game
Variation pattern setting processing (step Y269) is performed, variation start information setting processing (step Y270) for setting variation start information for the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and time reduction variation start update processing (step Y271) is performed. . Next, set "1" for special figure 2 fluctuating processing as the processing number (step Y272), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), blink control timer in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (special figure 2 indicator 52
flashing cycle timer) (step Y277
), the initial value ("0" indicating a blank design here) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y278), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 28 shows the falling lottery process (steps Y244, Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this drop lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is in effect (step Y581), and if not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the drop lottery process is terminated. Also, if it is in the special figure high probability (step Y581; Y)
In step Y582, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value.
). Winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The drop lottery determination value is a plurality of continuous values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or greater than the drop lottery lower limit determination value, which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery determination value, and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery determination value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is judged that the fall lottery has been won.

If the falling lottery random number is less than the lower limit judgment value for falling lottery (step Y582; Y), that is, if the falling lottery is not won, the falling lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the fall lottery random number value is not less than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the target fall lottery random number value is greater than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (step Y583).
If the drop lottery random number is greater than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the drop lottery is not won, the drop lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the drop lottery random number value is not greater than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (
Step X583; N), that is, when the falling lottery is won, a process for shifting to a low probability state is performed.

In the processing for transitioning to the low probability state, first, a signal regarding high probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big win 2 signal is set to ON, and the big win 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O
FF, special pattern 2 high probability state signal OFF, special pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF,
The special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y5
86), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and end the falling lottery process. As a result, the low-probability state and general/universal electric power non-supported state are established, and the state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, the information of the end of the high probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 3
00 performs processing such as changing the presentation mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 29(a) shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepare it (step Y282), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 ( Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y284), and if it is a big hit (step Y284; Y)
, the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not it is a big hit according to whether the obtained big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is a big hit (step Y286; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y281 (step Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (step Y285) is not a big hit (
At step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 29(b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, RWM's special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for pending number 1)
Load and prepare the jackpot random number from (step Y293), special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (
1) is cleared to 0 (step Y294).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y)
to step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291 is overwritten with the small hit information. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (
At step Y300;N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 30 shows the big-hit determination process (steps Y285 and Y296) in the big-hit flag 1 setting process and the big-hit flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first,
A lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step Y311), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N
), it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (step Y313).

Then, if it is in the special high probability (step Y313; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step Y314), the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit It is determined whether it is greater than the determination value (step Y316). Also, if it is not in the special high probability (step Y313; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step Y315), the target jackpot random number value is the upper limit judgment Determine if greater than value (
step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y31
6; N), that is, if it is a big hit, set a big hit as the judgment result (step Y
318), the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
In FIG. 31, small hit determination processing (step Y29
9) was shown. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment process ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (
step Y322).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step Y323), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set the small hit as the judgment result (step Y324), and perform the small hit judgment process. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step Y
246). In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), special figure 1
Load the jackpot pattern random number from the jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step Y3
32). Next, a special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design save area (
step Y334). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the reason why the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, a special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), a stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design pattern area (
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here special figure 1 indicator 51)
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped on the screen and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and the special figure 1 round number Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop pattern number, save it in the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and proceed to step Y340. . These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol withdrawal area (step Y344), and the losing stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 33, the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step Y
266). In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y3
61; Y), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step Y362). Next, set the special figure 2 jackpot pattern table (step Y
363), acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). A jackpot type is selected by this process.
In addition, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, set the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table (step Y365), acquire the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number and save it in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, a special figure 2 indicator 52)
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped on the screen and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and the special figure 2 round number Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop pattern number, save it in the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and proceed to step Y370. . These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and when it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number Load the small hit pattern random number from the storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y37
6). Next, a special figure 2 small hit design table is set (step Y377), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y378). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y
379), and proceeds to step Y370.

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern withdrawal area (step Y380), and the losing stop pattern pattern is a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, prepare a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and save it in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y371) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372).
, Clear the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (step Y373), clear the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (step Y374), The stop symbol setting process of FIG. 2 is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
Based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game) to start the first change display game. It forms the first decision means that can be decided previously. In addition, the game control device 100,
Based on the second start memory stored in the second start memory means, the result and change mode information of the second change display game (special figure 2 change display game) can be determined before the start of the second change display game. Form a possible second decision means. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

From the above, the start winning opening 36 is disposed at a position where the game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is configured to is placed at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information about the variable time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and the second decision in the normal state (normal game state) the variation time that can be determined by the means as the variation time of the second variation display game is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means; Become.

Then, the information about the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the information about the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, according to the determined variation pattern Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. The information about the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information about the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information about the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Examples include variation commands containing information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole special figure 1 game processing.
Furthermore, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means as control information. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time according to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and when the measured time has passed the variation time It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set, but in this case, information about the fluctuation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the long fluctuation It is also possible to transmit a command only indicating that the In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the performance in detail.
The variable time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 based on the end of the variable time, and the variable display is stopped by the performance control device 300 upon receiving the stop command. make it In this way, the production control device 300
It is possible to reduce the burden of control in

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
In FIG. 34, the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24
7) was shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), the first half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop pattern pattern,
Obtain the second half offset data (step Y402), special figure 1 jackpot, that is, special figure 1
It is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403).
If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

Also, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reservation number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later.

After that, the second half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y405
), to end the special figure 1 information setting process. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the first half variation pattern is determined considering the number of special figure 1 reservations in the case of a loss, and the number of special figure 1 reservations is taken into consideration in the case of a big hit. A variation pattern is determined without

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26
7) was shown. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether it is during special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (step Y421). If it is not in the special low probability & short time (
In step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427).
. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game to be started from now on is 100 from the end of the special game state.
When it is a special figure variation display game of the times (number of times of support), it is determined that it is the time reduction final variation.

Then, if it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), step Y42
Go to 8. Also, if it is not the time reduction final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop pattern pattern are acquired. (Step Y424),
Move to step Y425.

On the other hand, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started from now on is won, it is determined to be the high probability final fluctuation.
If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), first half offset data and second half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and step Y
Go to 425.
Also, if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429). And if it is not a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y42
In 9; N), set the first half offset data for the special figure 2 loss/small hit at low probability (step Y430), set the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation (step Y432
), the process proceeds to step Y425.

Also, if the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half variation (variation mode before the start of the reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, the second half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y426
), to end the special figure 2 information setting process. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
Thus, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 2 reservations.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the special figure 1 variation start process described above. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y451), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y452), and the special The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1) in FIG. 1 and prepared (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, the stop pattern pattern is a lost stop pattern pattern (step Y454), and if the special figure 1 is lost (step Y454; Y),
Byte distribution processing (step Y455) is performed. In addition, when the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y454; N), a distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of data capacity saving. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. Also, the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and in order to enable more diverse effects, the size for losing is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 are prepared (step Y458). Next, a sorting process (step Y459) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y460). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y462). Then, acquire and prepare the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer (
Step Y463), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 and prepared (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y471), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472), and the special Prepare by loading the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1) in FIG. 2 (step Y
473).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, the stop symbol pattern is a lost stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and when the special figure 2 is lost (step Y474; Y),
Byte distribution processing (step Y475) is performed. Also, when the special figure 2 is not a deviation (step Y474; N), a distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, obtain the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of sorting and prepare it (step Y477), and load the variation pattern random number 2 from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2 are prepared (step Y478). Next, a sorting process (step Y479) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y480). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y482). Then, acquire and prepare the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer (
Step Y483), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 2 and prepared (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process ends. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 38 shows the fluctuation start information setting process (steps Y250, Y270) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is obtained (step Y553). Further, the second half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step Y555). Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y5
57).

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set. As the above added value in this case, the specified time (here, 60000m
Seconds) is the number of repetitions, the remaining time (
time less than 60000 ms) is calculated as an additional value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Also, if the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y559). A long variation is a variation pattern that is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is in a normal game state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

And, if it is not the start of the special figure 2 long fluctuation (step Y559; N), 0 to special figure 2
It is saved in the repetition count area of the game processing timer (step Y560). Also, special figure 2
If it is the start of the long fluctuation (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562).
, Prepare a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (step Y563), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y564). Next, the target pending number is updated by -1 (step Y566), the content of the target random number storage area is shifted (step Y566), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In this embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the long variation of special figure 2 in order to vary the time that is not enough for a 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the addition result is 600
Save the 00ms timer and the number of repetitions of 9, and decrement the timer in the timer interrupt process.
set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 long fluctuation is 10 minutes (= 60000 ms ×
10). Since the period of the timer interrupt is 4 milliseconds, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 39 shows the time reduction variation number update process (steps Y251, Y271) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (in the high probability state) (step Y571), and when it is in the special figure high probability (step Y571; Y), time End the shortened variation count update process. Also, if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether it is in the special figure time saving (step Y572). And, if it is not in the special figure time saving (step Y572; N
), the time reduction variation count update process is terminated. In addition, if it is in the special figure time saving (step Y572; Y), the time shortening variation frequency is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time shortening variation frequency has become "0" (step Y574) .

If the time reduction variation count is not "0" (step Y574; N), the time reduction variation count update process is terminated. Also, when the number of times of time reduction fluctuation becomes "0" (step Y57
4; Y), a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575), and a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example,
Special pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special pattern 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF,
Normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF)
is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, save the low probability number in the game state display number area (step Y577), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578
), save the normal pattern no time saving flag in the normal pattern game mode flag area (step Y579
). Then, since the game returns to the normal game state, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination flag area (step Y580), and the time shortening fluctuation number updating process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 40, special figure 1 fluctuation process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above
showed that. In this special figure 1 during fluctuation processing, first, +1 renewal of the number of output times of design determination (step Y621). Then, load and prepare the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area (
Step Y622), effect command setting processing (step Y623) is performed.

Next, to prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y624), effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the game machine of the present embodiment, since there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 . Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In this embodiment, for example, 600
The display time is set to m seconds, and 2000 m seconds in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is lost (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. Also, if the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y627;
N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y628). It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y629). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 being executed is based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit.
This is the case when the variable display game is forced to stop with a losing result. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If the special figure 2 is being displayed during processing (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not being displayed during processing (step Y629; N), the number of times of design determination output is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 set above as the display time of special figure 2 A display time of display time + 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of special figure 1 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 2, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, the display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, and the display time is newly started. This reset will extend the stop indication time, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decoration special figure 2 is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y636), perform the production command setting process (step Y638), and perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y639), load the information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (Step Y640), information is loaded from the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, load the information from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), perform the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y643), special figure 1
End the display process.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 41, special figure 2 fluctuation processing (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game process described above
showed that. In this special figure 2 during fluctuation processing, first, +1 renewal of the number of output times of design determination (step Y651). Then, load and prepare the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (
Step Y652), effect command setting processing (step Y653) is performed.

Next, to prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y654), effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 ms for a loss, 600 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is lost (step Y657). If the special figure 2 is lost (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if the special figure 2 is not lost (step Y657;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y658). It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If it is not a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y65
9; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decorative special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y671 ), effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and step Y673
Move to

That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is resumed upon completion of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, if it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the fact that the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If special figure 1 is being displayed during processing (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. In addition, if the special figure 1 is not being displayed during processing (step Y660; N), the number of times of design determination output is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 set above as the display time of special figure 1 A display time of display time + 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of special figure 2 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 1, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started. This reset will extend the stop indication time, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 miss pattern command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y667), perform the effect command setting process (step Y668), and perform the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y669).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y673), whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit Determine (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, load information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675),
Load the information from the special figure 2 big prize opening information area and save it in the big prize opening information area (
Step Y676). After that, load the information from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678), special figure 2 End the display process.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
In FIG. 42, special figure 1 display processing (step Y111) in the special figure 1 game process described above
showed that. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y7
51), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753).
, If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variation display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 1 hit signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754)
.

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y755), and the production command setting process (step Y756).
I do. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment,
2 big win signals and 3 big win signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning hole opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information
is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y764) is performed,
End the special figure 1 displaying process.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, a big hit flag 1
If is outlier information, it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y765), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y765; N), it is determined whether it is a time reduction final variation (step Y766). . Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined to be the high probability final variation. Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the 100th special figure variation display game (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command Setting processing (step Y768) is performed. Next, save the probability state command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), clear the left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y770), and whether it is a small hit of special figure 2, that is It is determined whether or not the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becoming a small hit (step Y771).

When it is during the small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y771; Y), it transfers to step Y774. On the other hand, if it is not during the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y771; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game state display unit 5
6 is turned off, and the display instructs left-handed hitting. After that, clear (information subtraction) during special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area (step Y774), save the special figure 1 normal processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), special figure 1 End the display process.

[Special figure 2 display process]
FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the special figure 2 game process described above. It should be noted that special figure 2 during display processing, processing equivalent to the above-mentioned special figure 1 during display processing, is intended to perform the special figure 2 as a target. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag 2 areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game A test signal (for example, condition device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y817), and the production command setting process (step Y818).
I do. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the big prize opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment,
2 big win signals and 3 big win signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning hole opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information
is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y826) is performed,
End the special figure 2 display process.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, a big hit flag 2
is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). And, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y8
27; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y828), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y828; N), it is determined whether it is a time reduction final variation (step Y829). Here, when the drop lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that it is the high probability final variation. Also, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game of the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final variation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and a production command Setting processing (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area for power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of the small win opens the big winning opening, but the player is not made aware of the occurrence of the small win. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y834),
Effect command setting processing (step Y835) is performed. Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838).
). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.
After that, the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y841), and special figure 2
Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and processing during special figure 2 display is completed.

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y843), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y84
3;N), it is determined whether or not it is the time reduction final variation (step Y844). Here, when the drop lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that it is the high probability final variation. Also, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is 100 times from the end of the special game state (
If it is a special figure variation display game of support number), it is determined that it is a time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and a production command Setting processing (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left. After that, clear (information subtraction) during special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area (step Y850), save the special figure 2 normal processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), special figure 2 End the display process.

That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the conditional device based on the second special result of the variable display game. Eggplant.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing]
In FIG. 45, fanfare /
The process transition setting process during interval (steps Y764, Y826) is shown. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big win (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the jackpot 1 signal to be output with a big hit or a small hit is set to ON, and the jackpot 4 signal to be output with a big hit is set to ON.
Set the signal to ON.

Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 variation time The shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special game mode is executed. Toku-zu low probability, saving no time saving flag in the flag area (step Y875). Then, the normal game mode flag area saves the normal game time saving flag (step Y876), and the probability information command (low probability ) is saved (step Y877). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

Next, clear the time reduction variation count area for managing the number of games to be in the time saving state (step Y878), and save the big hit information in the special figure status area (step Y879). Furthermore, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880
), and the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881).
After that, since the special game state is entered, the information other than the normal base state is saved in the normal base state determination flag area (step Y882), and the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
46 and 47 show the fanfare/interval process (steps Y112, Y145) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this fanfare/interval processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y939; N), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y940).

If it is not the first round (step Y940; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, if it is the first round (step Y940; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (step Y941). Here, in the present embodiment, after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game, the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 so that the special game state is started. there is It should be noted that the start condition of the special game state may be established by the game ball passing through a gate provided separately from the normal figure starting gate 34 .

If there is no game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (step Y941; N), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a game ball passing through the normal pattern start gate 34 (step Y941; Y), a round number upper limit table is prepared (step Y942), and the round number upper limit information is loaded and prepared. (step Y943),
2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y944). The round number upper limit value thus acquired (10 in this embodiment) is saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y94).
5). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the obtained round number upper limit information is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prizes won is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area for the top major winning opening (step Y948). After that, the ON output data of the continuous operating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y950).
. Then, a round command corresponding to the special prize opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot process control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot step control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot is won. A large winning opening opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). As the initial value of the process control pointer during the big hit, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In the present embodiment, long opening with V corresponds. Also, when opening once in one round, the end value of the jackpot operation (
In this embodiment, 2) is set. Note that the initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of openings and closings in one round.

Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). A lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N),
Stop data for the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960). And, if it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960;
In Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y962). on the other hand,
If it is not a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960; N), that is, if it is a special figure 2 jackpot, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening time It is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, save the signal related to the opening start of the upper prize-winning hole in the test signal output data area (
Step Y965). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Next, the first
In order to open the opening and closing member of the special variable prize winning device 38, the upper large prize winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the large winning opening count number for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare/during interval processing ends.

In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit, only the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened,
In the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit, only the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but it is not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing mode in the first special game state may be a mode in which the upper big prize winning opening is opened in the first round and the lower big winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 48 shows special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y11
5) was shown. In this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed by the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data at step Y1101 does not have time reduction, the jackpot end setting processing 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction at step Y1101, the jackpot end setting processing 2 ( Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passing information (step Y1104). In this embodiment, the specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operating area),
If the specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. If there is no specific area passing information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variable operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) (step Y1107).

If it is not the specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; N), step Y1
109. On the other hand, in the case of irregular passing through the specific area (step Y1107;
In Y), irregular probability information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108
), effect command setting processing (step Y1109) is performed. A probability information command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 by the process of step Y1109. As the probability information command to be sent here, there are multiple commands that include information on the production mode in either "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", or "low probability / no time saving". Yes, irregular probability information is added in the case of probability variation operating area irregular passage.

Next, set "0" related to special figure 1 normal processing as the processing number (step Y1110),
The process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1111). Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112).
Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the winning signal to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114),
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1
115), clear the special figure status area (step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. And special figure 2 game wait time value (
For example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 jackpot end processing is terminated.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figures 1 and 2, but in the timer interrupt process, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing with the timer interrupt that performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117,
The start processing of the special figure 2 variation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the game control device 100 keeps the second variable display game execution control means in the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the processing related to the start of the first variable display game after the special game state ends. 2. Game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the variable display game from becoming executable.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 49 shows special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y14
8) was shown. The special figure 2 jackpot end process is step Y110 in the special figure 1 jackpot process described above.
Equivalent processing is performed except that 9 is not performed. In this special figure 2 jackpot end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed by the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). Step Y113
If the time reduction determination data is no time reduction in 1, jackpot end setting processing 1 (step Y1
132) is performed, and when the time reduction determination data indicates that there is a time reduction at step Y1131, a jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passing information (step Y1134; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variable operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) (step Y1137).

If it is not specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; N), step Y1
139. On the other hand, in the case of irregular passing through the specific area (step Y1137;
In Y), irregular probability information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138
), effect command setting processing (step Y1139) is performed. A probability information command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 by the process of step Y1139. As the probability information command to be sent here, there are multiple commands that include information on the production mode in either "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", or "low probability / no time saving". Yes, irregular probability information is added in the case of probability variation operating area irregular passage.

Next, set "0" relating to special figure 2 normal processing as the processing number (step Y1140),
The process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1141). Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143).
Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the winning signal to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144),
The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag for the fraud monitoring period of the upper prize gate (step Y11
45), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is terminated. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 50(a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of no time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and not output.

Next, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal and ordinary electric accessories 1 Set the open extended state signal to OFF.
After that, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1153),
Save the general pattern time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step Y1154)
. Next, save the special figure low probability and no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and set the time reduction variation number area to 0 for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1
157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. By this processing, the normal game state is entered.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 50(b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1
161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal and normal electric accessories 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1163),
Save the normal map time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area (step Y1164)
. Next, save the special figure low probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and initialize the time reduction variation number area for managing the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state Save the value (step Y1166). In this embodiment, the number of times of support is 100, so 100 is saved as the initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By this process, it becomes the second specific game state with a special figure low probability. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, it is a right-handed mode during the time saving state,
Since the right hitting mode is set from the middle of the big win, the right hitting is not set in the big win end setting process 2.例文帳に追加

[Jackpot end setting process 3]
FIG. 51 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105, Y1135) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal related to the start of the special figure time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1
171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, save the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (
Step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON. After that, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1173
), save the special figure high probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1
175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, game state display number 2
The number in the right hitting state is saved in the area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is finished. This processing results in a high-probability state. That is, by executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 1, it becomes the first specific game state,
By executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 2, the second special figure high probability
It becomes a specific game state.
By the above processing, it becomes possible to set the specific game state, which is a high probability state, after the first special game state ends. That is, the game control device 100 is a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3 with a high probability of special symbols) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game is a special result is higher than the normal state. constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating

[Processing during small win fanfare]
FIG. 52 shows the small hit fanfare process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this small-hit fanfare mid-process, first, a small-hit opening command for opening the lower big winning opening is prepared (step Y1201), and effect command setting processing (step Y1202) is performed. Next, set 8 for small hit middle processing as the processing number (step Y1203), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204
).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric accessory 2 in operation signal is turned ON) is the test signal Save in the output data area (step Y1206). and,
Save the lower large winning opening ON data in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y12
07), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the process during small winning fanfare ends.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
In FIG. 53, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y15
2) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 for special figure 2 normal processing is set as a processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and clear the special figure status area ( Step Y1336). By clearing the special status area,
The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

Next, it is determined whether it is during special low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (step Y133
7), if not in special low probability & short time (step Y1337; N), step Y
Go to 1340. Also, if there is no special low probability & time saving (step Y1337;
In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (step Y1340).

And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N),
The special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y
) prepares the decoration special figure 1 resume command (step Y1341), and performs the production command setting process (step Y1342). After that, clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area (
Step Y1343), end the special figure 2 small hit end processing. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variation display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device 100 controls the execution of the first variable display game (game control device 1
00) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100), the execution of one of the variable display games is controlled by the variable display game execution control means.
When the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means results in a special result, the one variable display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the other variable display game is entered. It constitutes restart control means capable of executing restart control for restarting one of the variable display games that has been interrupted after the end of the game.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the normal game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) is performed to monitor the input from the gate switch 34a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. Prepare the normal map game sequence branch table in the register (
Step B5), the general-purpose game processing number is loaded and prepared (step B6), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step B7). As a result, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal game processing number is acquired from the normal game sequence branch table, and a subroutine call is performed according to the normal game processing number (step B8).

In step B8, if the normal pattern game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal pattern fluctuation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
Further, in step B8, when the general pattern game processing number is "1", a general pattern variation process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the general pattern display process is performed.

Further, in step B8, if the general pattern game processing number is "2", if the result of the general pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern opening time is set according to whether or not it is in the time saving state. Or, during the general pattern display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal pattern per process.
Further, in step B8, if the normal game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal game is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set during the normal game. Processing (step B12) is performed.

Further, in step B8, if the general pattern game processing number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern per end processing is performed.
Also, at step B8, if the general pattern game processing number is "5", general pattern per end processing (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device (step B15), the pattern fluctuation control process (step B16) is performed, and the general-purpose game process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, if it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (step B11) in the above-described general-purpose map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the normal pattern display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded winning flag is winning information (step B503).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), set "0" for normal game processing as the processing number (step B520), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (step B521). After that, the during fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general/electrical fraud monitoring period flag area (step B522), and the general/universal map displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), prepare the process setting table during the hit (step B504), load the general pattern stop pattern information and prepare (step B505), 2 bytes Data acquisition processing is performed (step B506). As a result, the winning start pointer value and the winning end pointer value corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information are acquired from the winning process setting table.

Then, the value of the acquired hit start pointer (for example, "0" or "5") is saved in the control pointer area during the normal hit (step B507), and the acquired value of the hit end pointer (for example, "4" or "7") is saved in the end pointer area per normal pattern (step B50
8). Next, prepare a general electric open time table (step B509), load and prepare general pattern stop pattern information (step B510), and perform 2-byte data acquisition processing (step B511). Thereby, the general electric open time corresponding to the general electric open pattern information is acquired from the general electric open time table. Then, the acquired electric current open time (for example, 1700 ms or 260
0 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B512).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the normal per pattern (step B
513), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B514).
After that, the signal related to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (for example, the normal pattern 1 hit signal is ON) and the signal related to the normal electric operation start (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 is in operation signal is turned ON) are test signals The data is saved in the output data area (step B515), and the ON data is saved in the general solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general solenoid (step B516).

Furthermore, the information in the electric power count area that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B517), and the electric power that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 during the ordinary electric fraud monitoring period The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B518). Then, the flag for defining outside the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (fraud monitoring period outside flag) is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B519), and the process during normal diagram display is completed.

[2-byte data acquisition process]
In FIG. 56, 2-byte data acquisition processing in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing, special figure 2 game processing, fanfare/interval processing, general figure game processing and general figure display processing (steps Y107, Y140, Y944, B7 , B506, B511). In this 2-byte data acquisition process, first, the value of the register input as the pointer is doubled (step Y971), and the calculated value is added to the register input as the reference address (step Y971).
972). Then, 2-byte data is acquired from the address after the addition (step Y97
3) End the 2-byte data acquisition process.

[Symbol variation control process]
FIG. 57 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y117, Y154, B16) in the special figure 1 game process, the special figure 2 game process and the normal figure game process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure display unit 58 and setting the display data of the special figure. In this symbol variation control process, first, the address of the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1, special figure 2 or normal figure) is acquired (step Y1401), and it is checked whether the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating. Check (step Y1402)
.

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1403; Y), the pattern display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the pattern to be controlled is acquired (step Y1404), and the flashing control timer associated with the pattern to be controlled An area is prepared (step Y1405), and a 1-byte subtraction process is performed to update the flashing control timer associated with the symbol to be controlled by -1 (step Y140
6), it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, time is up (step Y140).
7).

If the blink control timer value is not 0 (step Y1407; N), step Y141
Go to 2. If the value of the flashing control timer is 0 (step Y1407; Y), the flashing control timer initial value (here, 100 ms) is saved in the flashing control timer area of the controlled object (step Y1408). (step Y1409), and prepares a fluctuation pattern number upper limit judgment value (common to special figures and normal figures) (step Y1410). Then, 1-byte addition processing is performed in order to update the variable design number related to the design to be controlled by +1 (step Y1411), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable design number area is obtained (step Y1412). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1415), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not fluctuating (step Y1403; N), the symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is obtained (step Y1413). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step Y1414
), save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step Y1415),
The symbol variation control process is ended. As a result, among the special figure 1 display device 51, the special figure 2 display device 52 and the general figure display unit 58, the special figure or general figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display or general figure display unit 58 to be controlled. will be displayed.

[1 byte subtraction process]
FIG. 58 shows the 1-byte subtraction process (step Y1406) in the symbol variation control process described above.
)showed that. In this 1-byte subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the content of the target area is 0 (step Y1421), and if it is 0 (step Y1421; Y), the 1-byte subtraction process ends. If it is not 0 (step Y1421; N), change the content of the target area to -
It is updated by 1 (step Y1422), and the 1-byte subtraction process ends.

[1-byte addition processing]
FIG. 59 shows the 1-byte addition process (step Y1411) in the symbol variation control process described above.
)showed that. In this 1-byte addition process, first, the contents of the target area are loaded (step Y1431), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step Y1432), and it is determined whether the updated value is smaller than the upper limit determination value (step Y1432). Y1433).

If the update value is smaller than the upper limit judgment value (step Y1433; Y), the update value is saved in the target area (step Y1435), and the 1-byte addition process ends. If the update value is not smaller than the upper limit judgment value (step Y1433; N), 0 is set as the update value (step Y1434), and the update value is saved in the target area (step Y1435).
, ends the 1-byte addition process.

[Production command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X601), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X602). If the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step X602; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the performance serial transmission buffer (step X601). If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step X602; N), the command data (MODE) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step X603).

Next, read the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step X604),
It is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X605). If the performance serial transmission buffer is full (step X605; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the performance serial transmission buffer (step X604). Also, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step X605; N), the command data (ACTION
) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step X606), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

In the above example, after the special result is derived, the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 as the start condition of the special game state, but as a modification, only the special result is derived. It may be used as a starting condition. In this case, the processing of FIGS. 61 to 64 is performed.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Instead of the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 42, the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 61 is performed. In this special figure 1 display process, when the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), FIG.
Steps Y942 to Y94 performed in the fanfare/interval processing shown in
6 is processed. In addition, in the processing (step Y754) for saving the test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) in the test signal output data area, the condition device operating signal is turned ON and the special pattern 1 hit signal is turned ON, and the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is turned ON.

[Special figure 2 display process]
In place of the processing during special figure 1 display shown in FIG. 43, processing during special figure 2 display shown in FIG. 62 is performed. In this special figure 2 display process, when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), FIG.
Steps Y942 to Y94 performed in the fanfare/interval processing shown in
6 is processed. In addition, in the processing (step Y816) for saving the test signal related to the start of the special figure 2 variation display game jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) in the test signal output data area, the condition device operating signal is turned ON and the special pattern 2 hit signal is turned ON, and the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is turned ON.

[Fanfare/In-interval processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 63 shows fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y764, Y826
)showed that. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big win (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON.
Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 variation time The shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special game mode is executed. Toku-zu low probability, saving no time saving flag in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, save the normal pattern no time saving flag in the normal pattern game mode flag area (step Y8
76), save the command output to the production control device 300 when the power failure is restored save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y877), special figure fluctuation that can be executed in the time saving state A time reduction variation count area for managing the number of executions of the displayed game is cleared (step Y878). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving operation state are terminated, and the normal-probability state and normal operation state are entered.

Next, save the big hit information in the special figure status area (step Y879), save the signal related to the right hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and save the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area. Save the number (step Y881). After that, the area for the number of fraudulent prizes won from the upper special winning opening is cleared (step Y882), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y883), and the fanfare/interval processing transition setting process is performed. exit.

In addition, even in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (steps Y764, Y826) in the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 42 and the special figure 2 displaying process shown in FIG. there is

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Instead of the fanfare/during interval processing shown in FIG. 46, the fanfare/during interval processing shown in FIG. 64 is performed. In this fanfare/during-interval processing, steps Y940 to Y949 are not performed. These processes are performed by the processes of FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG.

FIG. 65 shows a ROM 111B provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100.
An example of the data structure of As shown in FIG. 65, the ROM 111B contains, in order from the beginning,
Game control program area 111Ba, first unused area 11Bb, game control data area 111Bc, second unused area 111Bd, performance display program and performance display data area 111Be, third unused area 111Bf and program management area 111Bg
is provided.

The game control program area 111Ba is provided with an area for storing a game control program used for game control such as the above-described main processing and timer interrupt processing, and the game control data area 111Bc is used when judging a big hit. An area for storing game control data used by a game control program such as an upper limit judgment value table area for storing an upper limit judgment value table is provided. The game control program constitutes the first program, the game control data constitutes the first data, and these areas constitute the first storage area. In addition, the game control program area 111Ba and the game control data area 111B
The first unused area 11Bb between c may be included in the first storage area.

The performance display program and performance display data area 111Be is provided with an area for storing programs and data necessary for calculating base values and character ratios and displaying them on the performance display device 153, which will be described later. The performance display program constitutes the second program, the performance display data constitutes the second data, and these areas constitute the second storage area.

The program management area 111Bg contains a vector table area for storing a table for setting the start address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing, and for setting the internal functions of the gaming microcomputer 111 in terms of hardware. A HW (hardware) parameter area for storing the parameters of, an area for storing the model name, the manufacturer name, and the like are provided. The information in this program management area 111Bg is used by the game control program.

As described above, the ROM 111B stores programs and data that the game control device 100 uses. That is, the ROM 111B serves as first storage means for storing programs and data used by the game control device 100. FIG.

FIG. 66 shows an example of the data structure of the RAM 111C provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 66, the RAM 111C has, in order from the top, a game control work area 111Ca forming a work area for the game control program, a game control stack area 111Cb, an unused area 111Cc, and a work area for the performance display program. A performance display work area 111Cd and a performance display stack area 111Ce are provided.
An unused area may be provided after the performance display stack area.

In the game control work area 111Ca, a probability setting value area for storing probability setting values in order from the beginning, a power failure inspection area 1 for storing power failure inspection area check data 1 when a power failure occurs, and a probability setting value change mode. A probability setting mode flag area is provided for storing a probability setting changing flag when the probability setting is being changed. In addition, there are provided areas for storing information related to game control, such as an initial value random number area for storing initial values of various random numbers and a variation pattern random number area for storing variation pattern random numbers.

Furthermore, a normal base state determination flag area for storing a normal base state determination flag indicating that the state is not a special game state or a specific game state in order to calculate the base value, and an initial display when the power is turned on in the performance display device 153 An initial display setting flag area for storing an initial display setting flag for setting is provided. A power failure inspection area 2 for storing power failure inspection area check data 2 when a power failure occurs and a checksum area for storing checksum data when a power failure occurs are provided. This game control work area 111Ca constitutes a first work area which is a work area of the game control program forming the first program. In addition, you may make it also include stack area|region 111 Cb for game control as a 1st work area.

In the performance display work area 111Cd, in order from the top, a normal prize number counter area for counting the number of prize balls obtained in a normal game state that is neither a special game state nor a specific game state, and a game area in the normal game state A normal out counter area for counting the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 and a total out counter area for counting the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 regardless of the game state are provided.

Furthermore, four output data areas of the 1st to 4th digit output data areas are provided as areas for storing the display data of each 7-segment display in the performance display device 153 consisting of four 7-segment displays arranged side by side. is provided. The four 7-segment displays lined up on the left and right are the first digit from the right,
2nd digit, 3rd digit, and 4th digit. In addition, a stack pointer storage area is provided. This performance display work area 111Cd constitutes a second work area which is a work area for the performance display program forming the second program. Note that the performance display stack area 111Ce may also be included as the second work area.

As described above, the RAM 111C is provided with a work area for programs used by the game control device 100. FIG. That is, the RAM 111C serves as a second storage means that provides a working area for programs used by the game control device 100. FIG.

FIG. 67 schematically shows reading and writing of data. In principle, the first work area 111Ca is read and written by the first program (game control program) in the first storage area 111Ba. The second work area 111Cd is read and written by a second program (performance display program) in the second storage area 111Be. The first work area 111Ca has an area read from the second program, and the second work area has an area read from the first program.

The first work area 111Ca includes a first dedicated area 111Ca1 read and written only by the first program, and a first common area 111Ca2 at least written by the first program and read by the second program. Note that the first common area 111Ca2
, the first program may also be read. Examples of the first common area 111Ca2 include a normal base state determination flag area, an initial display setting flag area, and an area for storing a flag indicating that a large winning opening fraud is occurring or an electric power fraud is occurring. 1 dedicated area 1
11Ca1 includes other areas of the first work area.

Regarding the normal base state determination flag area forming the first common area 111Ca2, since the first program does not check the state of the normal base state determination flag area when saving the flag, the first program only writes, 2 The program only reads and does not write. In addition, the initial display setting flag area forming the first common area 111Ca2 and the area for storing the flag indicating that the big winning opening fraud is occurring or the electric power fraud is occurring are stored when the first program saves the flag. Then, the state of the area is read, and if the flag is not set, the flag is saved. That is, the first program reads and writes, and the second program only reads and does not write. Regarding the initial display setting flag area and the area for storing the flag indicating that the big winning slot fraud is occurring or the electric power fraud is occurring, the initial display setting is performed when the first program saves the flag. The state of the flag area may be written instead of being read.

The second work area 111Cd includes a second dedicated area 111Cd1 that is read and written only by the second program, and a second common area 111Cd2 that is written by the second program and read by the first program. Note that the second program may also be read from the second common area 111Cd2. The second common area 111Cd2 includes a first digit output data area, a second digit output data area, a third digit output data area, and a fourth digit output data area. The area of 2 work areas is mentioned. The first digit output data area, second digit output data area, third digit output data area, and fourth digit output data area forming the second common area 111Cd2 are stored when the second program saves information. The second program only writes because it does not check the state. Also, the first program only reads and does not write.

By dividing the storage area in the ROM 111B and the work area in the RAM 111C for the game control program and data and the performance display program and data as described above, development efficiency can be improved. In particular, the game control program is different for each model, but the performance display program is a common program or a program with a common algorithm for each model, so these can be stored separately. In the process of development, it is possible to clarify the parts to be modified and the parts not to be modified, and the efficiency of development can be improved. Also, by dividing the RAM 111C into areas corresponding to the performance display programs, it is possible to clarify the areas that can be used for the game control programs in the process of development, and to increase the efficiency of development. In addition, by separating the dedicated area that is used only by programs that correspond to work areas and the common area that is also used by programs that do not correspond to work areas, it becomes clear which areas are referenced by other programs, and development Efficiency can be increased.

The first common area 111Ca2 and the second common area 111Cd2 accessed by both the game control program and the performance display program are provided in the work area corresponding to the program on the side of writing the information. It may be provided in a work area corresponding to the program on the reading side. Also, here ROM111B and R of the game control device 100
Although AM111C was mentioned as an example, it is possible to divide and set an area|region similarly also with the production|presentation control apparatus 300 or another control apparatus. In addition, the area is divided into the game control program and the performance display program, but it is not limited to this, and the area is divided into the program that is not changed in the process of development and the program that is changed in the process of development. You can do it.

[Performance display monitor control process]
FIG. 68 shows the performance display monitor control process (step X122) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This performance display monitor control process constitutes one of performance display programs. In this performance display monitor control process, first, a stack pointer is saved in a stack pointer storage area provided in the performance display work (step X201), and an initial value for performance display control is set in the stack pointer (step X202). .

Next, all registers (both register banks 0 and 1) are saved in the performance display stack area (step X203), and the second work RAM check process for checking the performance display work area of the RAM 111C is performed (step X204). ). In the second work RAM check process, when an abnormality is found in the performance display work area, the performance display work area is cleared to 0, and an initial value other than 0 is set to an area that requires an initial value. Note that the stack pointer storage area and performance display stack area are not cleared to 0.

After that, the initial display timer update process for displaying the performance display device when the power is turned on is performed (step X205), and the switch detection information of the first work (game control work area) is changed to the second work (performance display work area). In this process, the information (rising edge) of the input port is copied. At this time, the switch information that is not necessary for calculating the base value is deleted. The switches necessary for calculating the base value include the winning opening switches 35a, 35b, and 35c of the general winning openings 351 to 354, the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, the large winning mouth switches 38a and 39a. , the starting opening 1 switch 36a of the starting winning opening 36
, the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 and the out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished the game.

Next, display content update processing is performed (step X207). In the display content update process, the display mode to be displayed on the performance display device is managed, and the display data is set in the first to fourth digit data areas of the performance display work area. Then, all registers are restored (step X208), the value of the stack pointer storage area is loaded into the stack pointer (step X209), and the performance display monitor control process ends.

[Initial display timer update process]
FIG. 69 shows the initial display timer update process (step X205) in the performance display monitor control process shown in FIG. This initial display timer update process constitutes one of performance display programs. In this initial display timer update process, first, it is determined whether or not the initial display setting flag, which is turned on when the power is turned on, is on (step X221). The initial display setting flag is stored in the initial display setting flag area of the game control work, which is the first work area forming the work area of the game control program, which is the first program. So this process
This is a process in which the performance display program, which is the second program, reads the information in the first work area.

If the initial display setting flag is not ON (step X221; N), that is, if the initial display timer update process is not executed for the first time after the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step X225. If the initial display setting flag is ON (step X221; Y), that is, if the initial display timer update process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on, the timer initial value is saved in the initial display timer area ( step X222). Here we save the value corresponding to 4800 ms. Next, the timer initial value is saved in the flashing control timer area (step X223). Here we save the value corresponding to 300ms.

After that, the initial value is saved in the flashing control pointer area (step X224), and if the initial display timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X225), and the initial display timer update process ends. Here, 0 and 1 are prepared as values of the flashing control pointer, and the value is switched each time the flashing control timer times out. When the value of the blink control pointer is 0, all segments of the performance display device are turned on, and when the value of the blink control pointer is 1, all segments of the performance display device are turned off. As a result, an initial display is performed in which all lights are turned on and all lights are turned off every 300 ms for 4800 ms.

[Performance display editing process]
FIG. 70 shows performance display editing processing (step X55) in the main processing shown in FIG.
showed that. This performance display editing process constitutes one of performance display programs. In this performance display editing process, first, the stack pointer is saved in the stack pointer storage area (step X231), and the initial value for performance display control is set in the stack pointer (step X232). Next, all registers are saved (step X233), and a second work RAM check process for checking the performance display work area of the RAM 111C is performed (step X2
34).

Next, it is determined whether it is time to switch the management section (step X235). The management section is a section for calculating a base value, and here, the section is switched each time the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 reaches 60000. If it is time to switch the management section (step X235; Y), initial setting for section switching is performed (step X236), and the process proceeds to step X240.

In the initial setting at the time of section switching, there is a normal prize ball counter area that counts the number of prize balls acquired in the normal game state that is neither the special game state nor the specific game state, and the game discharged from the game area in the normal game state. Clear the values of the normal out counter area for counting the number of balls and the total out counter area for counting the number of game balls discharged from the game area regardless of the game state. Also, the section final data, which is the last base value calculated in the ending section, is shifted to the area for storing the base values of the past sections. In the area that stores the base values for the past intervals, the base values for at least the three most recent intervals are stored in chronological order. While being stored in the value storage area, the already stored base values are sequentially shifted one by one to the old area.

On the other hand, if it is not the management section switching timing (step X235; N), it is determined whether there is an input to any of the monitored switches (step X237). The switches to be monitored are the switches necessary for calculating the base value. Large winning opening switches 38a, 39a, starting opening 1 switch 36a of starting winning opening 36
, the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 and the out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished the game.

The input information for these switches uses the information copied to the performance display work area in step X206 in the performance display monitor control process (see FIG. 68). This is because the performance display editing process is performed in the loop process of the main process, so it is performed at a faster cycle than the timer interrupt process. This is because there is a possibility that the count will be repeated multiple times.

Then, if there is an input to any of the monitored switches (step X237; Y),
A prize ball addition determination process is performed (step X238), and the process proceeds to step X240. In the prize ball addition determination process, the number of prize balls corresponding to the input winning switch is added to the normal prize ball number counter. Also, when there is an input to the out ball detection switch, it is added to the normal out counter and the total out counter.

The counters other than the total out counter are incremented only when the game is in the normal game state and the big winning opening fraud and the electric power fraud are not occurring. Addition to the total out counter is made regardless of the gaming state. Whether the game is in the normal game state is determined by referring to the normal base state information stored in the game control work. Further, it is determined by referring to the corresponding flag stored in the game control work, which indicates that the corresponding fraud is occurring, whether the big winning opening fraud is occurring or the general electrical fraud is occurring. That is, the area for storing the normal base state information in the game control work, the information indicating that the big winning slot fraud is occurring or the general electrical fraud is occurring is an area that is read by the performance display program that constitutes the second program. .

Here, the big winning slot fraud is the number of winnings to the special variable winning device in the state where the special variable winning device is not opened in each of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39. A certain first abnormal winning number is counted, and when the first abnormal winning number reaches a predetermined number, a flag is set as a first abnormal state, indicating that a large winning opening fraud is occurring. In addition, the general electric fraud counts the second abnormal winning number, which is the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 in a state where the normal variable winning device 37 is not opened, and the second abnormal winning number reaches a predetermined number. When it reaches, a flag is set as a second abnormal state, indicating that electric power irregularities are occurring.

Therefore, even if a special variable winning device wins a prize while the special variable winning device is closed, it will be used to calculate the normal base value, not the big winning mouth fraud, until the number of first abnormal winnings reaches a predetermined number. It is possible. In addition, even if a prize is awarded to the normal variable prize winning device 37 while the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, the calculation of the normal base value is not performed until the second abnormal prize winning number reaches a predetermined number. Available.

In addition, in one prize ball addition determination process, the process is performed for one switch, and the information about the switch that has been processed is cleared, so that multiple switches are sequentially processed. ing. Since the performance display editing process in which the prize ball addition determination process is performed is performed in the loop process in the main process, it is performed multiple times at intervals of the timer interrupt process. The number of times is at least equal to or greater than the number of switches monitored in the prize ball addition determination process.

If there is no input to any of the monitored switches (step X237; N), division task processing is executed (step X239), all registers are restored (step X240),
Load the value of the stack pointer storage area into the stack pointer (step X241),
End the performance display editing process. In division task processing, a normal base value is calculated according to the following formula. The calculated value is rounded off to the first decimal place.
Normal base value = (value of normal prize ball counter) / (value of normal out counter) x 100
The calculated base value is displayed on the performance display device by being set in the first to fourth digit output data areas in the display content update process (step X207) of the performance display monitor control process (see FIG. 68) described above. become.

[Output processing]
FIG. 71 shows output processing (step X105) in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.
showed that. This output process constitutes one of the game control programs. In this output process, first, the output port 1 for outputting the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50
OFF data is output (reset) to 35 (step X271). Next, data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c, the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, and the lever solenoid 38f are synthesized and output (step X272).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X273), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
digit line output data (step X274). In this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3. Next, the obtained data and external information data are combined (step X275), and the combined data (eg, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) is sent to the output port for digit/external information output. 136
(step X276).

After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RAM 111C corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X277), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step X278). In this embodiment, when the value of the digit counter is 0, the digit line and segment line of the special figure 1 indicator 51 are selected, and when the value of the digit counter is 1, the digit line of the special figure 2 indicator 52 and segment lines are selected. Also, when the value of the digit counter is 2, the digit line and the segment line of the normal figure display unit 58 are selected, and when the value of the digit counter is 3, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 5
3, the digit line and segment line of the special figure 2 suspension display 54, the normal figure suspension display unit 59, the first game state display unit 56, the time saving state notification unit 60, the probability display unit 57, and the round display unit 55 are selected be. As a result, the plurality of light-emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step X279), and the combined data (
For example, data of "jack signal 1", data of "jack signal 2", data of "jack signal 3", data of "jack signal 4", data of "symbol determination number signal", data of "start signal" , data of "main prize ball signal") and the output data of launch permission (step X2
80), and outputs the synthesized data to the output port 137 for outputting external information/launch permission signal (step X281).

Next, it is determined whether or not the initial display setting flag, which is turned on when the power is turned on, is on (step X282). If the initial display setting flag is on (step X282; Y), that is, if it is the first execution of the output process after the power is turned on, 1 to 4 of the performance display device
The process of loading and outputting the digit output data (steps X283 to X286) is skipped, and the process proceeds to step X287. This is because the performance display device data has not been set.

If the initial display setting flag is not ON (step X282; N), that is, if the output process is not executed for the first time after the power is turned on, the first to fourth digit output data of the performance display device are loaded and output. Processing (steps X283 to X286) is performed. This will
A display is made on the 7-segment display for each digit of the performance display device. The 1st to 4th digit output data of the performance display device are updated in the display contents update process (step X
207), it is set in the 1st to 4th digit output data areas.

That is, the 1st to 4th digit output data areas provided in the second work area are written by the performance display program which is the second program, and the second common area which is read by the game control program which is the first program It is what makes up. As described above, the performance display monitor control process is performed in the loop process in the main process, and the execution interval is not necessarily constant, so it is not suitable for dynamic control of the performance display device 153 . Therefore, the display data set in the performance display monitor control process is read in the output process performed in the timer interrupt process to control the display of the performance display device 153 .

After that, the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test equipment
data to be output to are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 (step X287). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test-firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X288).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (step X289). Further, it loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step X290). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (step X291) to terminate the output process.

The output data of the segment line corresponding to each digit line is R
It is designed to be set in the segment area for each display provided in AM111C (RWM). Specifically, it is set in the special figure game process shown in FIG. 27, the symbol variation control process (see FIG. 54) in the normal figure game process shown in FIG. 56, and the segment LED edit process shown in FIG. Since all of these processes are performed in one timer interrupt process, output data corresponding to all segment lines are set in the segment area of the RAM 111C regardless of the value of the digit counter. Of the segment line output data thus set, the segment line output data corresponding to the current value of the digit counter is selected and used.

Further, as described above, the RAM 111C can retain stored data even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In the RAM 111C, the segment area for storing the segment line output data and the area for storing the value of the digit counter are the checksum calculation targets in the checksum calculation process executed when the power supply to the game machine is stopped. It is included in the area where Therefore, it is subject to the legitimacy determination performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. As a result, when the game machine recovers normally from the power failure, it is possible to restart the display of the collective display device 50 from the state at the time of the power failure.

72(a) to (d) show an example of the display method of the performance display in the performance display device 153. FIG. In this case, three or more sections divided each time the value of the total out counter reaches a predetermined value (here, 60000) have already been completed, and the normal base value of each section is stored. state.

In the display on this performance display device 153, the display of the real-time normal base value in the current section shown in FIG. 72(a), the display of the normal base value in the previous section shown in FIG. Display of the normal base value in the interval two times before shown in c), FIG. 72 (d)
The display of the normal base value in the section three times before shown in is switched every 5 seconds and displayed. When the display of the performance display device 153 is started after the power is turned on, the initial display is performed for 4800 ms by repeating all lighting and all extinguishing of all segments including dots every 300 ms.

In the display of the real-time normal base value in the current section shown in FIG. 72(a), the display indicating that the real-time normal base value in the current section is displayed is the third and fourth digits counted from the right. "bL." Then, the real-time normal base value in the current section is displayed in the ratio segment composed of the 7-segment display of the first and second digits. Here, "35" is displayed. Note that the normal base value is calculated according to the following formula, and the calculated value is rounded off to the first decimal place.
Normal base value = (value of normal prize ball counter) / (value of normal out counter) x 100
If the number after rounding off to the first decimal place is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment. Also, when the value of the normal out counter is 0, "00" is displayed in the ratio segment.

In the display of the normal base value in the previous section shown in FIG. 72(b), the 7-segment display in the third and fourth digits indicates that the normal base value in the previous section is displayed. "b1." is displayed in the identification segment composed of. Then, the normal base value in the previous section is displayed in the ratio segment composed of the first and second digit 7-segment displays. The method of calculating and displaying the normal base value is the same as in the case of FIG. 72(a).

In the display of the normal base value in the section two times before shown in FIG. 72(c), "b2." is displayed in the identification segment as a display indicating that the normal base value in the section two times before is displayed. Then, in the ratio segment, the normal base value in the section two times before is displayed. The method of calculating and displaying the normal base value is the same as in the case of FIG. 72(a). In the display of the normal base value in the section three times before shown in FIG. 72(d), "b3." is displayed in the identification segment as a display indicating that the normal base value in the section three times before is displayed. Then, in the ratio segment, the normal base value in the section three times before is displayed. The method of calculating and displaying the normal base value is the same as in the case of FIG. 72(a).

FIG. 73 shows an example of the contents of the performance display after the gaming machine is powered on for the first time. Figure 73(a)
) shows the division of the section from the first power-on of the gaming machine. Note that the initial power-on of the game machine includes the state immediately after the content of the performance display work is reset due to some abnormality, in addition to the time when the power is turned on for the first time.

Interval A, which starts when the power is turned on for the first time, ends when the total number of game balls (out balls and safe balls) discharged from the game area reaches 300 regardless of the game state. In this section A, game balls are shot and prizes are awarded to the prize-winning openings due to inspection and adjustment of the gaming machine, so an accurate base value cannot be calculated, so the normal base value during this period is not evaluated.

When section A ends, section B starts as a new section. This section B ends when the total number of game balls (out balls and safe balls) ejected from the game area reaches 60000 from the start of the section regardless of the game state. When the interval B ends, the normal base value calculated from the counting results over the entire period in the interval B is saved, and the interval C starts as a new interval. This section C ends when the total number of game balls (out balls and safe balls) discharged from the game area reaches 60000 from the start of the section regardless of the game state. After that, every time the total number of game balls (out balls and safe balls) ejected from the game area reaches 60000 from the start of the section regardless of the game state, the normal base value in the ending section is saved. Start a new interval.

FIG. 73(b) shows an example of display on the performance display device 153 in each section shown in FIG. 73(a). A real-time display of the current segment, bL. In the case of section A, "bL." is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment. Section A
The value of is not subject to evaluation, so the numerical value is not displayed. If the normal out counter value is less than 6,000 in the interval B or later, the identification segment blinks "bL." lights up. The ratio segment displays the calculated value in real time. If the value of the out counter is less than 6000, the reliability of the value is usually low, so that fact is indicated by blinking display of the identification segment.

b1. , which is the display in the interval two times before b2. , 3
b3. ”, “b1.”, “b2.” or “b3.” is flashed in the identification segment, and “--” is displayed in the ratio segment if the corresponding value is not stored except for the value in section A. indicate. Also, if the corresponding values are stored, the identification segment is illuminated with "b1.", "b2." or "b3." and the value is displayed in the ratio segment.
The value displayed in the ratio segment here is the normal base value calculated at the end of the corresponding interval.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a control means ( A game control device 100), and the control means includes a first storage means (ROM 111B) that stores programs and data used by the control means, and a second storage means (RAM 111C) that provides a work area for the program. A first storage area 111Ba in which a first program that is a program and first data that is data are stored in the first storage means
and a second storage area 111Be that stores a second program that is a program and second data that is data. The first storage area 111Ba and the second storage area 111Be are
The second storage means has a first work area 111Ca which is a work area for the first program and a second work area 111Cd which is a work area for the second program. A first work area 111Ca and a second work area 111Cd are set with an unused area 111Cc interposed therebetween. a first dedicated area 111Ca1 that is not read or written;
A first common area 111Ca2 that can be read and written by the first program and that can be read by the second program. Therefore, the usable area for each program becomes clear in the process of development, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, the control means is a game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, the first program and the first data are game control programs and data relating to the control of the game, the second program and The second data is a performance display program and data for displaying information about the balance of game value in the gaming machine. Therefore, in the process of developing the game control means, the usable area for each program becomes clear, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In addition, the first work area includes a dedicated area 111Ca1 that is read and written by the first program but not read and written by the second program, and a first work area that is written at least by the first program and can be read by the second program. Common area 111Ca2
and, in the second work area, a second dedicated area 111Cd1 that is read and written by the second program but not read and written by the first program, and a second dedicated area 111Cd1 that is at least written by the second program and read by the first program. second common area 11 capable of
1Cd2 and . Therefore, in the process of developing the game control means, the usable area for each program becomes clear, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a control means (game control means) for controlling the game A control device 100) is provided, and the control means performs loop processing that repeats predetermined processing and timer interrupt processing that is executed at predetermined time intervals, and uses information set in the timer interrupt processing in the loop processing. Thus, the cycle of loop processing is set shorter than the cycle of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the information set in the timer interrupt processing can be reliably acquired in the loop processing, and reliable control processing becomes possible.

In addition, a game area 32 where game balls can flow down, and a winning area (general winning openings 351 to 354, starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning apparatus 37, first special A variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning device 39) are provided, and the winning area can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win and an open state in which game balls can easily win, A normal variable prize winning device 37 capable of generating the right to execute the game by winning a prize is included. Ordinary fluctuation winning device control means (game control device 10
0), a base value calculation means (game control device 100) for calculating a base value from the number of prize balls paid out for winning a prize in the prize area, and the number of game balls shot to the game area 32; with
In the timer interrupt processing, information as to whether it is in the special game state, information as to whether it is in the second operation state, information on the number of prize balls based on winning in the prize winning area, and the number of game balls shot into the game area 32 and the base value calculation means, in the loop processing, based on the information set in the timer interrupt processing, the base value in a state that is neither the special game state nor the second operation state It means that it was made to calculate. Therefore, the information set in the timer interrupt process can be reliably acquired in the loop process, and the base value can be reliably calculated.

In addition, the winning area includes special variable winning devices (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) that are opened in the special game state to enable winning.
The first abnormal winning number, which is the number of winnings to the special variable winning device when the special variable winning device is not opened, is counted, and when the first abnormal winning number reaches a predetermined number, the first abnormal state is set. set, and the normal variable winning device 3 in a state where the normal variable winning device 37 is not opened
7, and when the second abnormal winning number reaches a predetermined number, a second abnormal state is set, and the base value counting means counts the first abnormal winning number or Until the second abnormal winning number reaches a predetermined number, the information on the number of winning balls and the information on the number of shots are used to calculate the base value even if there is the first abnormal winning number or the second abnormal winning number. When the first abnormal winning number or the second abnormal winning number reaches a predetermined number and the state becomes the first abnormal state or the second abnormal state, information on the number of prize balls and information on the number of shots and are not used to calculate the base value. Therefore, it is possible to reliably calculate the base value.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 74 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 74, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, allow generation of display data (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, a hall setting mode process is performed for accepting settings of changeable ranges such as brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume (step C10). Processing is performed (step C11). Next, random number update processing (step C1
2).

Next, a received command check process (step C13) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C14) for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C15). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C16). In this embodiment, the V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C16 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C16; N), the process of step C16 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C16 that it is time to switch frames (step C16; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

After that, sound control processing (step C18) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C18) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C19), a movable body control process (step C20) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 and the reel 6 is performed, and the board for controlling effects by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, etc. The effect setting process (step C21) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 75 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (
Step C201), determine whether or not the command reception count is 0 (step C202)
. If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, copy the contents of the receive command buffer to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, the command (data
can be moved to create space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that copying of the commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 76 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
Then, it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23
4).

If it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
At step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235
At ;Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
At step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. and MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big-hit command (step C237; Y), the big-hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined at step C237 that the MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), symbol-based command processing (
Step C240) is performed to terminate the received command analysis process.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
At step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the pending number command and error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include customer waiting demo commands, reserved number commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error/illegal commands, model designation commands, winning notification commands, and the like. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed,
Terminates received command analysis processing.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
At step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. Also, in step C245,
If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N)
, the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Processing of variable commands]
FIG. 77 shows the variable command processing (step C2) in the received command analysis processing described above.
36) was shown. In this variation-based command process, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the symbol system command process described above.

If this special figure type is undecided (step C361; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, check the combination of the variation command and the symbol command (
Step C362), it is determined whether the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C
363).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3
63; N) determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, winning symbols, 16R big-hit symbols, 10R big-hit symbols, small-hit symbols, and the like. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent means that the variation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command for the 16R jackpot symbol is received. It means that it is a contradictory combination (combination of variation command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variable effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect corresponding to the variable command is performed (step C365).

Next, the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is set to special figure fluctuation (step C366
). Here, "during special figure fluctuation" means that the special figure is fluctuating (not during a demonstration waiting for customers, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Furthermore, if the number of look-ahead effects (the number of times of look-ahead execution) is not zero, the number of look-ahead effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of look-ahead effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process ends.

Next, an effect corresponding to winning a prize will be described. It is possible to display the number of prize balls to display the number of prize balls at the corresponding position of the display device 41 according to the prize winning for each of the prize winning openings that can win when the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area 32. It has become. Display device 4 is shown in FIG.
1 shows an example of the display position of the display of the number of prize balls. For the sake of explanation, FIG. 78 shows a state in which all the number of prize balls are displayed, but in reality, only the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening is displayed for a predetermined period after the winning. . Also, the display of the number of winning balls is displayed in the first specific game state ST2.

When there is a win in the general winning hole 351 provided in the upper right part of the center case 40, the number of prize balls based on the winning in the general winning hole 351 is displayed at the display position 41a near the general winning hole 351. "+3" is displayed as the number of prize balls corresponding to three. When the first special variable winning device 38 provided on the right side of the center case 40 wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is displayed at the display position 41b near the first special variable winning device 38. The display of the number of prize balls is displayed as "+15" corresponding to 15, which is the number of prize balls based on the winning of .

When there is a winning in the normal variable winning device 37 provided on the right side of the center case 40, a prize based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 is displayed at the display position 41c near the normal variable winning device 37. The number of prize balls is displayed as "+12" corresponding to one ball. When there is a win in the general winning opening 352 provided on the lower right side of the center case 40, the number of winning balls based on the winning in the general winning opening 352 is displayed at the display position 41d near the general winning opening 352. "+3" is displayed as the number of prize balls corresponding to three. When there is a win to the second special variable winning device 39 provided on the lower right side of the center case 40, the second special variable winning device 39 is displayed at the display position 41e near the second special variable winning device 39. The display of the number of prize balls is displayed as "+15" corresponding to 15, which is the number of prize balls based on the winning of .

The general winning opening 351 and the general winning opening 352 in the game area 32 on the right side detect winning game balls with different sensors, and the winning notification command is also a separate command. Therefore, the production control device 300 can determine which general winning slot the player has won, and the corresponding number of winning balls can be displayed. Also, the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39 and the normal variable winning device 37 detect winning by separate sensors and have separate winning notification commands. It is possible to determine which winning device has won, and display the corresponding number of winning balls.

By displaying the number of prize balls in this way, it is possible to clearly show the fact that the prize balls have been won in the first specific game state ST2, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to clearly indicate which winning slot the player has won, and to clearly indicate how many prize balls have been obtained by the winning, so that highly interesting presentation can be performed. In particular, in the first specific game state ST2, prize balls are mainly obtained by winning prizes in the second special prize winning device 39, but in addition to this, prize balls are obtained based on prize winning in the general prize winning ports 351 and 352. By showing the winning to the player, it is possible to improve the interest based on the winning in the general prize-winning opening, which has not received much attention so far, and to improve the interest in the game. Also, it is possible to clarify acquisition of prize balls by winning in the normal variable winning device 37 and the first special variable winning device 38 .

In addition, a general prize winning opening 353,
354 is designed to be detected by the winning opening switch 35c after the winning game balls join. This reduces the number of winning opening switches to be used and reduces the cost. On the other hand, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 351 and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 351 in the game area 32 on the right side, which is the object of displaying the number of winning balls, are attached near the winning opening. . Therefore, the winning to the general winning openings 353 and 354 in the game area 32 on the right side is detected at an earlier timing from the inflow. This will
The time lag from winning a prize to displaying the number of prize balls can be reduced, and the number of prize balls can be displayed without discomfort.

Note that the number of winning balls may be displayed in the second specific game state ST2 as well. again,
The number of winning balls may be displayed not only in the specific game state, but also in the special game state and the normal game state. In addition, the start winning opening 36 and the general winning openings 353 and 3 in the left game area 32
It is also possible to display the number of winning balls for the winning of 54 as well.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the game is comprehensively controlled. game control means (game control device 100), performance control means (performance control device 300) for controlling the performance based on information from the game control means, a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down, and a game area 32, and a winning area where game balls can win (general winning opening 351 ~
354, a starting winning port 36, a normal variable winning device 37, a first special variable winning device 38, and a second special variable winning device 39), and a starting winning port capable of generating the right to execute the game is provided in the winning area. (Startup winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) and a plurality of winning ports (general winning ports 351 to 3
54), and the game control means selects a predetermined winning opening (general winning opening 35) among a plurality of winning openings.
1, 352), it is possible to transmit information that enables identification of the prize winning opening to the effect control means. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect according to the prize-winning opening, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, when receiving the information that can specify the winning opening, the effect control means can execute different effects according to the winning winning hole. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the plurality of winning openings may include a special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) that is opened in the special game state to enable winning. Also, the plurality of winning openings may include the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning opening 37 . In addition, the normal figure starting gate 34 may be included. Also, the plurality of prize winning openings may be winning openings that are neither the start winning openings nor the special variable winning openings. Also, the plurality of prize-winning ports may be prize-winning ports capable of always winning prizes.

In addition, the game area 32 includes a first area and a second area, and is configured so that the player can select which area the game ball is to flow down by adjusting the shooting force. is provided with a start winning opening 36 that can always win a prize and general winning openings 353 and 354, and the second area includes a special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39 ), a normal variable prize winning device 37 which is a starting prize opening and can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize, and an open state in which game balls can easily win a prize, general prize openings 351 and 352, When the game ball wins in the general winning holes 351 and 352 provided in the second area, the game control means transmits information for specifying the winning general winning holes to the effect control means. is possible.
Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the winning general prize winning slot, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Next, the look-ahead effect will be described. The look-ahead effect is an advance notice effect that determines the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, etc. before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory, and suggests or informs the determination result. For the look-ahead effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment,
Decoration special figure start memory display and special figure fluctuation display during execution Displaying information on start memory about the game Suspension change notice performed by display mode of execution suspension display, background and other effects are specific effects A zone notice, a prize-winning notice in which a sound or display effect is performed when the start memory to be notified occurs, and a special figure fluctuation display based on the target start memory Decorative special figure fluctuation executed before the game There is a chance notice that the result mode of the displayed game is a specific result mode.

79 and 80 show examples of these look-ahead effects. First, the display on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 79(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. Here, the decoration special figure variable display game is displayed by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas. In the upper left part of the display area, a second decoration game display section 8 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game.
8 is provided. The second ornament game displayed in the second ornament game display section 88 has left, middle, and right areas in the same manner as the first ornament game displayed in the ornament special figure variation display game display section 85. After displaying the identification information in a variable manner, it stops and displays the results.

In addition, a memory display section 83 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The memory display portion 83 is provided with a first memory display portion 83a that displays the first starting memory and a second memory display portion 83b that displays the second starting memory. The decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the first memory display unit 83a corresponds to the first start memory one by one,
They are displayed side by side in order of storage, and here, it indicates that there are three first starting memories. The decoration special figure start memory display of the left end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the 1st start memory memorized first, and is designed to shift to the left each time it is digested. Moreover, in the second memory display part 83b, similarly to the first memory display part 83a, the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory one-on-one is displayed. Here, it indicates that the second starting memory is 0.

On the left side of the first memory display section 83a, there is provided a running memory display section 84 for displaying a running memory display for displaying information related to starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently running. To this in-execution memory display section 84, the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the first memory display section 83a or the second memory display section 83b is shifted at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game.

A starting memory number display section 86 for displaying the number of starting memories is provided in the upper right part of the display area. This starting memory number display section 86 has a first starting memory number display section 86a for displaying the number of first starting memories.
and a second start memory number display portion 86b for displaying the number of second start memories.

When the first start memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 79(a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display section 83a is displayed as a running memory display as shown in FIG. 79(b). Part 8
4 is displayed. Also, in the starting memory number display section 86, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 86a is decreased by one. Then, in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85, a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory is started.
The variable display of the identification information starts in each of the middle and right variable display areas. Also in the second decoration game display unit 88, a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory is started, and identification information is displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area. Variable display is started.

FIGS. 79(c) and (d) show an example of the pending change notice. The pending change notice is shown in FIG.
), and the memory display during execution shown in FIG. 79(d). multiplication). The execution time of this pending change notice depends on the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the start and the execution time of each special figure fluctuation display game, and is an indefinite time. It should be noted that the display mode of the pending change notice is not limited to the one shown here, and may be different in shape and size.

FIG. 79(e) shows an example of zone notice. In the zone notice, the background is a different background (here, shaded) from the normal background (here, white), and "Chance Zone" is also displayed to indicate that the zone notice is being executed. The execution time of this zone notice is
It depends on the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the start and the execution time of each special figure fluctuation display game, and it is an indefinite time. It should be noted that the manner in which the zone notice is executed is not limited to the one shown here, and any mode may be used as long as the player can recognize that the zone notice is being executed. For example, the pattern display mode of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 may be different from normal, or the output mode of sounds such as BGM and the light emission mode of LEDs may be different from normal. Also good.

FIG. 79(f) shows an example of a prize-winning notice. In the notice at the time of winning, a notice sound different from usual (here, a sound of "ding-pong") is output with the occurrence of the start memory to be notified. This notice sound is a predetermined sound, and the execution time of the notice at the time of winning is always constant. It should be noted that the mode of execution of the notice at the time of winning is not limited to the one shown here, and it may be a mode in which an effect display is performed in accordance with the generation of the start memory, which is a mode of notice, or a mode in which the effect button is vibrated.
The ED may emit light in a specific light emission mode.

FIG. 80 shows an example of a chance notice. While executing the special figure variation display game as shown in FIG. 80(a), a first starting memory is generated as a new starting memory as shown in FIG. 80(b). As shown in FIG. 80(c), in the special figure variation display game in which this starting memory has occurred, the result aspect set at the start of the special figure variation display game (here, "547 ”) is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(d), the next special figure variation display game is started. At this time, the first starting memory generated in FIG. 80(b) is set as the notice target, and the chance notice is started from this special figure variation display game. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(e), the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game of the special figure variation display game is the result mode of "123" which is the chance eye. It should be noted that the result mode of the chance eye is the result mode of losing.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 80(f), the next special figure variation display game is started, and FIG.
, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game of the special figure variation display game is also the result aspect of "123" which is the chance eye. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(h), the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory which is the object of notice is started. The result mode of this special figure variation display game corresponds to the result of the special figure variation display game, and if the result is a big hit, FIG.
As shown in (i), it becomes a special result mode, and if the result is a loss, it becomes a result mode other than the chance eye as shown in FIG. 80(j).

The execution time of each time of this chance notice is a stop time for displaying the mode of the losing result, and is always a fixed time. It should be noted that the mode of executing the advance notice of the chance game is not limited to the one shown here, and a special symbol that is not displayed except for the chance game may be stopped and displayed.

FIG. 81 shows a period for drawing lots to determine whether or not to execute each look-ahead effect, a period during which the effect can be started, and a period during which the effect can be executed. The pending change notice is the occurrence of the start memory to be notified (t10
The lottery, start, and execution are possible at any timing or period between 1) and the end of the game (game D) to be announced (t109). Therefore, the player can always have a sense of expectation that the pending change notice will be started. The executable period is from the start of the pending change notice to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game to be notified (t109), and this period varies depending on the execution time of each special figure fluctuation display game. The period is indefinite.

The zone notice is given at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game (game B, C, D) started after the special figure fluctuation display game (game A) in which the starting memory of the notice target has occurred (t103, t105, t
107) can be drawn and started. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the zone notice will start at the start of the special figure variation display game. The executable period is the period from one of the above start timings to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game to be notified (t109), and this period is the period of each special figure fluctuation display game. Since it changes depending on the execution time, the execution period is an indefinite period.

Winning notice can be drawn, started, and executed at the time when the start memory to be notified occurs (t101). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation when the starting memory occurs. In addition, since a predetermined sound is emitted, the executable period is a predetermined fixed period from the generation of the starting memory to be notified.

The chance notice is a special figure fluctuation display game that is started after the special figure fluctuation display game in which the start memory to be notified occurs and before the special figure fluctuation display game to be notified (here, the game B, C) is started (t103, t105). The timing at which the chance notice can be started is after the special figure variation display game in which the start memory to be announced has occurred and before the special figure variation display game to be announced. (Here, games B and C) are stopped (t104, t106).

In addition, the executable period is the special figure variation display game ( Here, it is the stop time (t104-t105, t106-t107) of games B and C). If there are multiple executable periods and it is executed in the previous game, it will also be executed in the later game. By such a chance notice, the player can have a sense of anticipation at the end of the special figure variation display game. Since this chance notice is performed over a predetermined fixed period of time called the stop time, the period during which it can be executed is a fixed period.

In this way, by making it possible to execute multiple types of prefetch effects with different lottery timings, start timings, and executable periods, from the occurrence of the start memory that is the target of the notice to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that is the target of the notice. Various look-ahead performances can be executed, the player can continue to have expectations for the start of the look-ahead performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the pending change notice can be started at any time, and in addition, the notice at the time of winning is started when the prize is won, the zone notice is started at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the chance notice is started when the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is stopped. There is a possibility that By distributing the startable timings of the look-ahead effect in this way, the startable timings come one after another, and the player's sense of expectation can be maintained without interruption. In addition, since it can be started at a timing that is easy for the player to understand, such as the occurrence of a prize, the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the stoppage of fluctuation, the player can watch the start of the look-ahead effect with anticipation, and the game will be improved. Interest can be improved.

The above look-ahead effects are divided into the first group that can be continuously executed even during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game that is the target of notice, and the second group that ends before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that is the target of notice. , and can be started from the special figure fluctuation display game in which the starting memory to be notified is generated, and the special figure fluctuation display game in which the starting memory to be notified is generated Start after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game a possible fourth group;

Pending change notices belong to the first and third groups, and zone notices belong to the first and fourth groups. Winning announcements belong to the second and third groups, and chance announcements belong to the second and fourth groups. In this way, the combination of groups to which each prefetch effect belongs is different, so that the characteristics of each prefetch effect are different, and various prefetch effects can be executed, and when selecting the prefetch effect to be executed By making selections based on groups, it becomes possible to select effective effects.

The look-ahead effect belonging to the first group can effectively increase the player's sense of expectation in the special figure variation display game, which is the announcement target that the player pays the most attention to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation continuously from before the start of the special figure variation display game to be notified until the result is derived. The look-ahead effect belonging to this first group can be executed by lottery to determine whether it can be executed even when the special figure fluctuation display game for which the notice is started (t107), and it has been executed at the opportunity until then. Even without it, it has the possibility of being executed in the special figure fluctuation display game for which notice is to be given. Also, the execution period of the look-ahead effect belonging to the first group is an indefinite period because it changes depending on the execution time of the special figure variation display game included in the execution period.

The look-ahead effect belonging to the second group can effectively increase the player's sense of expectation until the special figure variation display game. Further, since the look-ahead effect belonging to the second group does not relate to the effect of the special figure variation display game to be announced, the effect of the special figure variation display game to be announced can be freely selected. For example, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game targeted for notice is lost, it is possible to select the same low-expectation production as if there was no prefetch production in the special figure fluctuation display game targeted for notice, and the game is played excessively. It is possible to avoid stirring up people's expectations. In addition, even if a low-expectation look-ahead effect is being executed, it is possible to switch to a high-expectation effect in the special figure fluctuation display game targeted for notice, and even if a low-expectation look-ahead effect is performed, It can give you hope.

In addition, for the look-ahead effect belonging to the second group, lottery for selecting whether to execute is not performed when the special figure variation display game to be notified is started (t107). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of prefetch performances required to draw lots at the start of the special figure variation display game to be notified to only the prefetch performances of the first group, simplify the selection process, and reduce the burden of control. be able to. Also, the execution period of the look-ahead effect belonging to the second group is a predetermined constant period that does not depend on the execution time of the special figure variation display game.

Since each look-ahead effect belongs to either the first group or the second group, by making a selection based on the group to which it belongs, an effective effect can be produced according to the situation. For example, the first
The look-ahead effect belonging to the group is particularly effective when the degree of expectation is high, and the look-ahead effect belonging to the second group can perform an effective effect even when the degree of expectation is low. Therefore, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the starting memory as the notice target is a big hit, the selection ratio of the look-ahead effect belonging to the first group is higher than when the result is a loss, and conversely, it is in the second group. It is possible to select to lower the selection ratio of the prefetch effect belonging to it. If the result is no, the opposite selection ratio is possible. That is, an effective prefetch effect can be performed regardless of the level of expectation.

The look-ahead effect belonging to the third group can raise the player's expectation from an early stage. The look-ahead effect belonging to this third group is when the start memory to be notified occurs (
At t101), it is possible to execute a lottery to decide whether or not to execute the game, and the advance notice effect can be executed from this timing.

The look-ahead performance belonging to the fourth group can secure the possibility of performing the look-ahead performance even if the look-ahead performance of the third group is not performed, and the look-ahead performance is not performed when the start memory occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being lowered by not confirming that the degree of expectation is low. In addition, it is possible to prevent the performance of the special figure variation display game being executed from being affected when the start memory to be notified is performed.

The look-ahead effect belonging to this fourth group is when the starting memory to be notified occurs (t
101), no lottery is held to decide whether or not to execute. Therefore, when the starting memory to be a notice object occurs, the types of prefetching performances that need to be drawn can be reduced to only the prefetching performances of the third group, and the selection processing is simplified to reduce the burden of control. can be done. By making the start timing of the look-ahead performance different in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp when the look-ahead performance is started, and the interest can be maintained even if the game is played for a long time.

Also, since each look-ahead effect belongs to either the third group or the fourth group, by making a selection based on the group to which it belongs, it is possible to produce an effective effect according to the situation. For example, when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory as the notice target is a big hit, the look-ahead effect belonging to the fourth group is further performed when the effect belonging to the third group is executed than when the result is a loss. It is possible to select a higher execution ratio. Further, when the result is a loss, it is possible to select a higher ratio of executing only one of the third group and the fourth group than when the result is a big hit.

Each look-ahead effect of the first group to the fourth group can be executed in duplicate,
You may make it provide the combination which does not perform duplication. For example, the zone notice and the chance notice may not be executed in duplicate. If the timings of the two lotteries overlap and one lottery is selected to be executed first, the other lottery may not be executed. Which one has priority may be determined in advance, or may be selected by a separate lottery.

In addition, in order not to execute both the advance notice at the time of winning and the notice at the time of the chance, it is checked whether the notice at the time of winning is being executed at the time of the lottery of the notice at the time of the chance, and if the notice at the time of winning is executed. , the lottery itself for the advance notice of the chance may not be performed. i.e.
Whether or not to execute the subsequent lottery may be determined according to the result of the previous lottery.

Furthermore, even if it is a look-ahead effect that can be executed in duplicate, whether or not the look-ahead effect has already been executed, and whether or not the look-ahead effect to be started later can be executed depending on what kind of look-ahead effect is being performed Execution contents, selection probabilities, etc. may be different. In this case, the table to be used for the subsequent lottery for the prefetching effect is selected depending on whether or not the prefetching effect that has already been executed is executed. In addition, even if you consider the result and variation pattern of the special figure variation display game for which the notice is given as factors that affect the execution of the later look-ahead effect, the execution content, the selection probability, etc., the current game state and the number of starting memories. good. By performing the lottery in multiple stages in this way, it is possible to make a flexible selection according to the progress of the game compared to the case where the lottery is performed at once when the starting memory is generated, and it is possible to make a more interesting look-ahead effect. can.

Moreover, it may be arranged to indicate that the degree of expectation is higher to execute multiple look-ahead effects than to execute one look-ahead effect. Also, the degree of expectation may be different depending on overlapping combinations. Also in this case, when the lottery times overlap, it is selected whether or not the overlap is allowed according to the results and contents of the special figure variation display game to be announced. In addition, referring to the contents of the pre-reading performance executed earlier, selection is made as to whether to overlap the pre-reading performance at the later lottery timing.

In addition, regarding the look-ahead performance belonging to the fourth group which is not executed at the time when the starting memory to be notified is generated, the look-ahead performance belonging to the fourth group is executed during the period until the time when the look-ahead performance belonging to the fourth group can be started. It is also possible to perform an effect suggesting the possibility of being killed. For example, it is conceivable to superimpose and display a pattern corresponding to the chance eye as a see-through transparent pattern on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, or perform a performance display suggesting the start of the zone notice. Since it is a suggestive effect, there may be a case where the suggested look-ahead effect is not executed after the relevant effect.

Further, as an effect suggesting the start of the look-ahead effect, a display suggesting or notifying execution of another look-ahead effect may be performed in the display of the pending change notice. For example, as a pending change notice, "Zone" may be displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display to suggest or notify the execution of the zone notice.

In addition, regarding the look-ahead effect belonging to the third group, depending on the situation of the special figure variation display game in which the start memory to be notified has occurred, the look-ahead effect is not started immediately even if execution is selected by lottery. Also good. For example, when a specific effect (such as SP reach) is being executed in a special figure variation display game in which a start memory to be notified has occurred, or before the end of a special figure variation display game in which a start memory to be notified has occurred is a predetermined period of time. In this case, in the case of a look-ahead performance that can be started even at a later timing like a pending change notice, the start time may be delayed so that the look-ahead performance is started after the elapse of a period in which the look-ahead performance cannot be started.

Further, in the lottery for each look-ahead effect, it may be possible to select whether or not the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the content of the look-ahead effect, and the start timing. For example, in the lottery when the starting memory to be notified about the pending change notice occurs, in addition to the determination of execution, it may be possible to determine the start time of the next special figure fluctuation display game for the start time. Also, it may be possible to select to start from the special figure variation display game later than the special figure variation display game whose execution is decided for the zone notice or the chance eye notice. Any method can be used to specify such a start time, and it is possible to specify timing other than the timing related to the execution of the special figure variation display game. For example, it may be determined to start after a predetermined time from the lottery timing, and a timer effect may be performed in which a timer indicating the time until the start of the look-ahead effect is displayed.

As described above, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a state advantageous to the player is generated. , a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that become the execution right of the game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize winning device 37); Prior determination means (game control device 100) for determining the starting memory before the game corresponding to the starting memory is executed, and an advance notice effect which is an effect suggesting the determination result by the prior determining means can be executed. and a performance control means (performance control device 300), the performance control means is configured to select and execute a foretelling performance to be executed from among a plurality of types of foretelling performance, and the foretelling performance is selected as a foretelling target. A first group that can be continuously executed even during the execution of a game that is to be notified, and a second group that ends before the start of the game to be notified, and a starting memory to be notified is generated. It belongs to either the third group capable of starting the notice performance from the game or the fourth group capable of starting the notice performance after the end of the game in which the start memory to be the notice object is generated. Therefore, the notice effects having different characteristics depending on the group to which the player belongs can be realized, and various notice effects can be realized, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, the performance control means can execute a plurality of advance notice performances redundantly, and can select the contents of the notice performance to be executed later according to the kind of the notice performance executed first. Therefore, it is possible to make a flexible selection according to the current situation, and it is possible to make the advance notice effect more interesting.

Further, at a predetermined specific time in the game, it is decided according to the group to which each notice effect belongs, which notice effect is to be selected among the respective notice effects. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the timing for determining whether or not to execute the performance, and the timing for executing the advance notice performance is distributed, so that the player can have expectations over a wide period of time, and the amusement of the game can be improved. can.

In addition, the effect control means can select whether or not to execute the advance notice effect belonging to the first group when the game to be the notice target forming the specific period is started, and the second group For the notice effect belonging to , it is impossible to select whether or not to execute the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a notice effect which can decide whether or not to execute when the game to be notified is started, and a notice effect which cannot be executed, so that the notice effect can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved. can be improved.

Further, the effect control means can select whether or not to execute the advance notice effect belonging to the third group when the starting memory to be the notice object forming the specific time is generated. For the notice effect belonging to , it is impossible to select whether or not to execute the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a notice performance in which execution is possible and a notice performance in which execution is not possible when the start memory to be the notice object occurs, and the notice performance can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved. can be improved.

Further, the advance notice effects belonging to the first group have a variable execution period, and the advance notice effects belonging to the second group have an invariable execution period. Therefore, an appropriate execution period can be set according to the attribute of the advance notice effect. In other words, for the notice effects belonging to the first group that can be continued even during the execution of the game to be the notice, by making the execution period variable, the player in the game to be the notice is most likely to pay attention. can effectively raise the expectations of In addition, for the announcement effect belonging to the second group that ends before the start of the game that is the target of the announcement, by making the execution period unchanged, the effect is produced using only a certain amount of time in the game up to the game that is the target of the announcement. can be performed so as not to interfere with the performance of the game that is not subject to notice.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 game machine 36 starting winning opening 37 normal variable winning device (starting winning opening)
100 game control device (game control means, start storage means, prior determination means)
300 production control device (production control means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
a starting memory means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories that are the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole;
advance determination means for determining the start memory before the game corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means is executed;
and an effect control means capable of executing a notice effect, which is a effect suggesting the determination result by the prior determination means,
The production control means is
configured to select and execute a notice effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of notice effects,
The announcement performance is
a first group that can be continuously executed even during execution of the game to be notified;
belong to either the second group that ends before the start of the game to be notified, and
a third group that can be started from the game in which the starting memory to be notified is generated;
and a fourth group that can be started after the end of the game in which the starting memory to be notified is generated,
At a predetermined specific time in a game, it is determined which of the advance notice effects to execute or not is selected according to the group to which each notice effect belongs ,
The ratio of executing both the third group notice effect and the fourth group notice effect when the result of the game is a special result is the proportion of the third group when the game result is not a special result. making the ratio of executing both the notice effect and the notice effect of the fourth group higher than that of executing both;
A gaming machine characterized in that the notice effect belonging to the third group is capable of changing the start timing according to the situation of the game in which the starting memory to be the notice target occurs.

Images